Supply and Installation of Firefighting and Protection System For Berth B100 Part 1

BID ADVERTISEMENT FORM
Supply and Installation of Firefighting and Protection System for

Bid description
Berth B100
Bid number 1126901.M001
Name of institution Transnet Group Capital

The place where goods,
works or services are Port of NGQURA
required
Closing date and time Date 2 8 1 1 2 0 1 7 Time 12h00pm
Transnet Group Capital
26th Floor
Postal address Carlton Centre Office Block
150 Commissioner Street
Johannesburg 2001
26th Floor
Contact details Physical address Carlton Centre Office Block
150 Commissioner Street
Johannesburg 2001
Tel 011 308 1670
Fax N/A
email [email protected]
Contact person Hlekane Maringa
Bids may be downloaded directly from the National Treasury
Where bids can be collected
eTender Publication Portal and on TCP website free of charge
Entrance Foyer 26th Floor,
Where bids should be Carlton Centre Office Towers,
delivered 150 Commissioner Street,
Johannesburg
Category (refer to annexure A) Mechanical
Sector Mechanical Engineering
Region Eastern Cape
Date 09 November 2017
Compulsory briefing Time 10:00

session/site visit
N2 Neptune Road
Venue Training Room, TNPA Admin Building, Port of
NGQURA
BID ADVERTISEMENT FORM

A specialist unit of Transnet SOC Ltd,
Registration Number 1990/000900/30
ENQUIRY FOR THE SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF FIREFIGHTING AND

PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR BERTH B100 AT THE PORT OF NGQURA
RFP Number 1126901.M001
Issue Date 01 November 2017
Briefing Session and Site Visit Thursday, 09 November 2017 at

the Port of NGQURA
Closing Date 28 November 2017
Tender Validity Period 12 weeks from the Closing Date
NEC3 ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Enquiry Documents

Page 1 of 1
TRANSNET CAPITAL PROJECTS
CONTRACT NO. 1126901.M001

THE DESIGN 0F A FIREFIGHTING AND PROTECTION SYSTEM (CENTRAL FOAM INJECTION SYSTEM) TO B100
LIQUID BULK BERTH AND THE BUNKER BARGE BERTH : BERTH B100 FIRE PROTECTION
SUMMARY OF SECTIONS
SECTION DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
SECTION A: PRELIMINARY & GENERAL
SECTION B: SITE CLEARANCE & GENERAL
SECTION C: CONCRETE AND BUILDING WORKS
SECTION D: STORMWATER DRAINAGE AND PIPEWORK
SECTION E: MISCELLANEOUS
SECTION F: ELECTRICAL
SECTION G: INSTRUMENTATION
SECTION H: STEELWORK
SECTION I: FIRE WATER PUMP PACKAGE
SECTION J: FIRE WATER SYSTEM
SECTION K: FOAM SYSTEM
SECTION L: PORTABLE FIRE EQUIPMENT AND SIGNAGE
SECTION M: DESIGN REVIEW
SUB-TOTAL
ADD 14% VAT
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF SCHEDULES
DATE NAME Sign

ITEM PAYMENT SHORT DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE AMOUNT
SECTION 1 - PRELIMINARIES
SECTION 1 BILL NO.1
SANS1200 A PRELIMINARIES
NOTES
The works information and NEC contract conditions are to be

studied carefully when pricing the items in the Bill of Quantities
8.3 SCHEDULED FIXED- CHARGE AND VALUE RELATED ITEMS
8.3.1 Contractual requirements Item 1
8.3.2 Establishment of faccilities for the site
8.3.2.1 Facilities for the Engineer
a) Furnished Offices Item 1
b) Telephone Item 1
c) Nameboards Item 1
8.3.2.2 Facilities for Contractor Item 1
a) Offices and storage sheds Item 1
b) Workshops Item 1
c) Laboratories Item 1
d) Living accomidation Item 1
e) Ablution and latrine facilities Item 1
f) Tools and equipment Item 1
g) Water, electricity and communications Item 1
h) Dealing with water item 1
i) Access and access control Item 1
j) Plant item 1
8.3.3 Other Fixed Charged Obligations Item 1
8.3.4 Removal of site establishment Item 1
8.4 SCHEDULED TIME RELATED ITEMS
8.4.1 Contractual requirements Months 13
Operation and maintenance of facilities on site for

8.4.2 duration of the contract construction except where
stated.
8.4.2.1 Facilities for the Engineer
a) Furnished offices Months 13
b) Telephone Months 13
c) Name boards Months 13
d) Survey assistance and materials Months 13
8.4.2.2 Facilities for the Contractor
a) Offices and storage Months 13
b) Workshops Months 13
c) Laboratories Months 13
d) Living accomidation Months 13
e) Ablution and latrine facilities Months 13
f) Tools and equipment Months 13
Brought forward
Brought down
g) Water, electricity and communications Months 13
h) Dealing with water Months 13
i) Access and access control Months 13
j) Plant Months 13
8.4.3 Supervision for the duration of construction Months 13
8.4.4 Company and head office overheads duration of construction Months 13
8.4.5 Other time related obligations Months 13
8.7 Dayworks
(a) Unskilled labour hr 35
(b) Semi-skilled labour (Charge hand) hr 55
(c) Skilled labour (Artisan) hr 20
(d) Foreman hr 15
(e) Surveyor hr 80
Plant
(a) Trucks
(i) Tip Truck 6m3 hr 40
(ii) Tip Truck 10m3 hr 10
(b) TLB tractor fitted with backactor and loader hr 70
(c) Vibratory roller (self-propelled) hr 10
(d) Air compressor with all tools, drills, jackhammers, hr 60

etc.(10m3/min)
(e) Grader Cat 140G or equivalent hr 44
(f) Water truck (9 000litre) hr 10
(g) Bomag Roller hr 25
(h) 30t Excavator hr 40
(i) CAT D6 Dozer hr 55
(j) Walk behind Roller hr 25
8.8 Temporary works
8.8.1 Maintain Access Roads to site Months 13
8.8.1 Dealing with Traffic Months
Brought forward
Brought down
PSA8.9 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT AND

APPLICABLE REGULATIONS
A8.9.1 Compliance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act

and Applicable Regulations
1) Provision of a health and safety plan sum 1

2) Provision of a health and safety file sum 1
3) Provision of a safety officer (full time) sum 1
4) Health and safety training sum 1
5) Provision of personal protective clothing and equipment sum 1
PSA8.10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
A8.10.1 Compliance with the Environmental Management Plan sum 1
PSA8.11 COMMUNITY LIAISON OFFICER
A8.11.1 Community Liaison Officer month 16
PSA8.12 LOCAL AND OTHER LABOURERS
A8.12.1 The Contractor's obligations in respect of Local and other

Labourers:
a) Provision of transport of Local Labourers month 16
PSA8.13 TRAINING
a) Wages and salaries of Local and other Labourers employed

by Contractor, subcontractors and Emerging Contractors respect
sum 1
of training periods for on site training by the contractor during
which no productive work is executed
b) Accredited and approved training courses for selected Local
sum 1
and other Labourers including wages during training
c) Accredited and approved training for Emerging Contractors sum 1
d) Allowance for induction training for Contractor and
sum 1
subcontractors personnel
TOTAL CARRIED TO SUMMARY

Page 2

NO. REFERS
SECTION B: SITE CLEARANCE AND EARTHWORKS
B1 SABS1200 SITE CLEARANCE
B1.1 Demolish and remove off site to comercial dump existing :
a) 230 Brickwork m² 10
b) Rebar, mesh and structural steel. t 0.20
c) Mesh reinforced 170 mm RC slab. m² 5
d) Miscellaneous mass concrete m³ 2
B2 8.3.2 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS
B2.1 Strip topsoil to depth of 150mm and dispose of at commercial dump

for:
a) Pumphouse m² 200
b) Spill slab m² 96
c) Sump at spill slab m² 6
d) Monitor concrete column m² 50
e) Manholes nex to culvert m² 6.6
f) Culverts m² 100
g) Pipe supports m² 80
B2.2 8.3.3 Restricted excavation in all materials and stockpile on site.
a) Pumphouse foundations m³ 27
b) Spill slab m³ 230.0
c) Sump at spill slab m³ 17
d) Monitor concrete column m³ 25
e) Manholes next to culverts m³ 6
f) Culverts m³ 200
g) Pipe supports m³ 14
B2.3 Rip and recompact 150mm thick in-situ layer to 95% Mod AASHTO
to:
a) Pump house surfacebed m² 200
b) Culvert m² 100
c) Sump at spill slab m² 6
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD

Page 3

NO. REFERS
Brought forward
B2.4 Import and Backfill to fall with G5 material and compact in max.
150mm layers to 95% Mod AASHTO under
a) Spill slab m³ 155.0
b) Pump house plinths m³ 334.0
B2.5 Import and Backfill to fall with C3 material and compact in max.
150mm layers to 98% Mod AASHTO under
B2.6 Import and Backfill to falls with G7 material and compact in max.
150mm layers to 95% Mod AASHTO to new:
B2.7 Restricted backfill using insitu material stockpiled under item B.2.2 m³ 80
in 150 mm thick layers and compact to 93% Mod AASHTO to:
a) Pumphouse foundations m³ 10
b) Spill slab m³ 5.0
c) Sump at spill slab m³ 35
d) Monitor concrete column m³ 25
e) Manholes m³ 0.3
f) Culverts m³ 70
g) Pipe supports m³ 1
B2.8 Load surplus unpolluted material in stockpile on site and dispose of m³ 200
at a commercial dump site.
B.3 SABS EARTHWORKS (PIPE AND SLEEVE TRENCHES)

1200 DB
B.3.1 8.3.2 Excavate in all materials for trenches, backfill and compact,
a) 0 m To 0.6 m m 25
b) 0.6 m To 1.0 m m 50
c) 1.0 m To 1.8 m m 12
Extra over items B3.1 for excavation in hard rock m³ 5

Page 4

NO. REFERS
Brought forward
B4 SABS 1200 Provision of bedding material

LB
B4.1 8.2.2.2 From stockpiles on site:
a) Selected granular material m³ 108
B4.2 8.2.2.3 From Commercial Sources
a) Selected granular material m³ 5
TOTAL FOR SECTION B : TO SUMMARY

Transnet Capital Projects
Page 5
SECTION C: CONCRETE
NO. REFERS
SABS SECTION C: CONCRETE

1200 G
C1 8.1.1 FORMWORK
C1.1 8.2.2 Smooth vertical finish (Degee of accuracy II) to:
a) Sides of pumphouse foundations m² 66
b) Plinths inside pumphouse m² 32
c) Upstands around pumphouse roof slab. m² 109.5
d) Pumphouse walls m² 825
e) Base of sump next to spill slab m² 3
f) Walls of sump next to spill slab m² 20
g) Base of pipe supports m² 73.6
h) Plinths to pipe supports m² 340.8
i) Sides to culvert base m² 204
j) Sides of culvert walls m² 924
j) Sides to concrete column bases m² 108
k) Sides to concrete columns from:

i) 0 to 3.0m m² 24
ii) 3.0m to 6.0m m² 24
iii) 6.0m to 9.0m m² 24
iv) 9.0m to 10.5m m² 4
C1.2 8.2.2 Smooth horizontal finish (Degee of accuracy II) to:
a) Pumphouse roof slab m² 250
C2 8.3 REINFORCEMENT
C2.1 8.3.1 High tensile steel bars not exceeding 25mm diameter to:
a) Pumphouse footings t 6.70
b) Plinths inside pumphouse t 3.75
c) Pumphouse walls t 11
d) Pumphouse roof slab t 7.0
e) Sump next to spill slab t 9.00
f) Base of concrete column t 2.6
g) Concrete columns from:

i) 0 to 3.0m t 9.2
ii) 3.0m to 6.0m t 9.2
iii) 6.0m to 9.0m t 9.2
iv) 9.0m to 10.5m t 0.3

Page 6
SECTION C: CONCRETE
NO. REFERS
Brought forward
C2.2 8.3.2 High tensile welded mesh reinforcement
a) Ref. No. 395 excluding laps m² 2230
b) Ref No. 245 excluding laps m² 100
c) Ref No. 193 excluding laps m² 10
C3 8.4 CONCRETE
C3.1 8.4.3 30MPa/19mm concrete to:
a) Pumphouse foundation m³ 20.25
b) Pumphouse walls m³ 121.5
c) Pumhouse roof slab m³ 76.75
d) Plinths inside pumphouse m³ 11
e) Spill slab m³ 15.47
f) Base of sump next to spill slab m³ 1.875
g) Wall to sump next to spill slab m³ 25
h) Pipe support bases m³ 23
i) Plinths to pipe supports m³ 122.8
j) Bases of concrete columns m³ 36.3
k) Concrete columns from:

i) 0 to 3.0m m³ 6
ii) 3.0m to 6.0m m³ 6
iii) 6.0m to 9.0m m³ 6
iv) 9.0m to 10.5m m³ 2
l) Culvert base m³ 166.2
m) Culvert walls m³ 212.4
C3.2 Apply penatron admix to concrete for sump next to spill slab at a Sum 1
doasge. Rate of admix to be 0.8% of cement weight.
C3.3 Apply all inside areas of sump next to spil slab with 1,5kg/m² of m² 20
penatron applied by brush or spray.

Page 7
SECTION C: CONCRETE
NO. REFERS
Brought forward
C4 8.4.4 UNFORMED SURFACE FINISHES
C4.1 Wood floated finish to:
a) Top of pumphouse floor and plinths m² 250
b) Top of pumphouse roof slab and upstands m² 250
c) Spill slabs m² 91
d) Culvert walls and floor m² 308
e) Top of concrete columns m² 2
f) Top of slab in front of Pumphouse m² 50
C5 8.5 JOINTS
C5.1 Provide expansion joints in 170mm spill slabs complete as per m 340
detail, including joint filler, backing chord and DOW 888 sealant, etc.
in pumphouse floor.
C5.2 Provide construction joints in 170mm spill slabs as per detail, m 70

complete including reaming out the joint, backing chord and DOW
888 and sealing sealant, etc. in pumphouse floor.
C5.3 Provide 30 x 6 mm sawcut joints in 150 thick pumphouse m 350

surfacebed complete with backing chord and DOW 888 sealant in
pumhouse floor.
C5.4 Provide expansion joints in 150mm pumphouse surfacebed m 440

complete as per detail, including joint filler, backing chord and DOW
888 sealant, etc.
C5.5 Provide saw cut joints (SCJ) in 170 mm spill slab complete with m 10
dowels into existing slab as per detail, including joint filler, backing
chord and DOW888 sealant, etc.
C5.6 Provide construction joints in 170 mm spillage slabs as per detail, m 250
complete with backing chord and DOW888 sealant, etc.
C5.7 Supply and cast in pre-welded PVC water bars to sump next to spill m 10
slab, in the footing to wall connection.
C5.8 Supply and cast in pre-welded PVC water bars to culvert footing and m 280
wall connection.
C6 GROUT
C6.1 30MPa non-shrink grout to underside of baseplates. m³ 0.8
TOTAL FOR SECTION C : TO SUMMARY

Page 8
SECTION D: STORMWATER DRAINAGE & PIPEWORK

NO. REFERS
D.1 SECTION D: STORMWATER DRAINAGE AND PIPEWORK
D1.1 Supply and install SANS 10062 steel drainage pipe complete with
welded joints, bends, tees, rodding eyes and puddle flanges at all
cast in points & Denso wrapping to all below ground sections of
pipe. All pipe ends to have flanged ends and to be blanked off.
a) 200Ø m 40
D1.3 Supply and install steel gate valves with rising spindle with 900mm
high extension to bund sump drainage lines.
a) 200ø No 4
D1.4 Construct 1000 x 1000 deep closed concrete manhole (CMH) No 4

complete with excavation & backfill, concrete walls, floor and roof
with mesh ref 395, Type 2A manhole cover, step irons etc. All as
per detail on drawings.
D1.5 Constuct 500 x 500 x 500 deep pump bund sump (PBS) complete No 4
with excavation & backfill, concrete walls and floor with mesh ref
395, galvanized fully banded RS40 rectagrid cover with 30 x 3
bearer bars complete with galvanized 40 x 40 x 4 L frame with cast
in lugs.
D1.6 Construct 1000x1000 x 1000 deep electrcial manhole (EMH) No 6

complete with excavation and backfilling, 230 brick walls, floor and
roof with mesh ref 395, 900x900 double seal medium duty manhole
Besaans and Du Plessis product number 2160.
D1.7 Construct 500x400 oily water (O/W) catchpit complete with

excavation backfilling, concrete walls, and floor with mesh 395, No 2
galvanized fully banded RS40 Rectagrid cover with 50x4.5 bearer
bars and galvinized 60x60x6L angle frame with cast in lugs
D1.8 Supply and install 160Ø ribbed electrical sleeves complete with draw m 100
wires.
D1.9 Galvanized fully banded RS40 rectagrid cover m² 10

with 60 x 7 bearer bars complete with galvanized 60 x 60 x 5 L
frame with cast in lugs to manholes next to culvert
TOTAL FOR SECTION D : TO SUMMARY

Page 9
NO. REFERS
E1 SECTION E: MISCELLANEOUS
E1.1 Supply and lay 250 micron polythene sheeting to underside of m² 300
spill slabs and bund surfacebed.
E1.2 Supply and install step irons to manholes next to spill slab and No 24
mnaholes next to culvert
E1.3 Provide control tests extra over the requirements of SABS

1200 and the project specification if required
a) Soil Compaction tests (Field density tests) No 25
b) Concrete cubes, per 4 cube sample No 25
E1.5 Supply and install galvinized handrailing and access chains to m 10

new sump at spill slab manhole complete as per detail
including painting.
E1.7 Supply and install 100Ø galvanised steel sampling tube to No 1

sump next to spill slab complete with galvanized steel
brackets.
E1.10 Supply torch-on waterproofing to pump house roof slab. m² 250
E2 PRECAST CONCRETE
E2.1 Supply and install precast figure 3 kerbs on stabilised bedding, m 120
concrete haunching and jointing as per detail on drawings.
E2.2 Removable precast manhole covers to culvert and

pumphouse including formwork, rebar (150Kg/m³) conduits,
woodfloat finish, placing and all things necessary for the
following sizes:
a) 2100mmx1030mmx300mm (Culvert) No 136
b) 1600mmx1030mmx300mm (Culvert) No 25
c) 2400mm x 300mm (Pumphouse roof) No 6
E4 BLOCK PAVING
E4.1 Supply and lay grey (30 Mpa) 60mm interlocking blocks (Type
SA) on 20mm bedding sand to paved driveway. Rate to allow
for
all cutting, jointing and jointing sand to office parking area. m² 75
Rate
rate to allow for all cutting, jointing and sand

Page 9B
E5 CAST-IN ITEMS
E5.1 200ø pipe cast into concrete column, pipe length measures Sum 1
elsewhere.
E5.2 Support brackets cast into concrete column, tonnnage of steel Sum 1
measured elsewhere.
E5.3 Galvalised RWDP made of sheetmetal. Downpipes measured m 25

elsewhere.
E5.4 100Ø Full bores No 4
E6 MASONRY (Provisional)
E6.1 BRICKWORK IN FOUNDATIONS
Brickwork of NFX bricks (14 MPa nominal compressive

strength) in class II mortar
280mm Cavity Brick walls m2 95
300 x 300 Brick Piesr No 2
E6.2 BRICKWORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE
E6.2.1
Brickwork of NFX bricks (14 MPa nominal compressive
strength) in class II mortar
280mm Cavity Brick walls m2 196
300 x 300 Brick Piesr No 4

Page 9C
NO. REFERS
Brought forward
E6.3 FACE BRICKWORK 0
E6.3.1 Corobrik Silvergrey Rustic face bricks in stretcher bond 0

including pointing and jointing with 1:3 cement mortar with
smooth recessed horizontal and vertical joints
Extra over brickwork for face brickwork m2 196
Extra over brickwork in beamfilling m2 34
Extra over brickwork for face as linings to concrete m2 18
Fair raking cutting. m 50
E6.3.2 Brick-on-edge header course copings, sills, etc with recessed 0

joints on all exposed faces:
220mm Wide lintel pointed on face and 110mm soffit. m 45
220mm Brick on edge sill bedded sloping and jointed in cement m 45

mortar and pointed on top, edge and projecting soffit including
cutting and fitting between reveals and splay cutting brickwork
under.
E7 BRICKWORK SUNDRIES
E7.1 2,5mm Brickwork reinforcement
E7.2 150mm Wide reinforcement built in horizontally m 1006
E7.3 Bag down with 1:4 cement slurry and apply two coats
ABE Bituseal waterproofing paint.
E7.4 On outer face of inner skin of brick walls. m2 127
E7.5 Pre-stressed fabricated concrete lintels including

necessary
temporary supports
150 x 150mm Lintels in lengths not exceeding 3m m 75
E8 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS
E8.1 Allow for the Provisional Sum of R80,000.00 for roller shutter Provisional Sum
doors.
E9 PAINTWORK
E9.1 PAINTWORK ETC TO NEW WORK
Prepare and apply one coat Plascon Plaster Primer and 3

coats of Plascon Wall & All Paint
On walls m2 211
TOTAL FOR SECTION E : TO SUMMARY 0.00

.
Page 10
NO. REFERS
F1 POWER CABLES AND TERMINATIONS
F1.1 Deliver, offload and install within trenches,

sleeves, cable rack or ducts the following:
BLACK PVC/SWA/PVC/Cu 600/1000V
Multicore cables to SANS 1507 (TYPE P1)
F1.1.1 6mm² x 4 core m 100

F1.1.2 4mm² x 4 core m 250
F1.1.3 2.5mm² x 3 core m 60
F1.1.4 1.5mm² x 4 core m 30
F1.2 Gland, terminate and label the following TYPE

P1 cables within a NON HAZARDOUS AREA
(i.e. CW gland)
F1.2.1 6mm² x 4 core No. 4

F1.2.2 4mm² x 4 core No. 4
F1.2.3 2.5mm² x 3 core No. 4
F1.2.4 1.5mm² x 4 core No. 2
F1.3 Gland, terminate and label the following TYPE

P1 cables within a HAZARDOUS AREA
(i.e. EIW gland)
F1.3.1 4mm² x 4 core No. 2
F2 CABLE TRAY AND SUPPORT
F2.1 300mm width, cable tray, stainless steel m 50
F2.2 Angle Iron support for cabling, stainless steel,

50mm square edge m 100
F3 EARTH CABLES AND TERMINATIONS
F3.1 Supply, deliver, offload and install 10 mm² -

Insulated Copper Earth Conductor (antitheft) m 120
F3.2 Termination of 10 mm² - Insulated Copper

Earth Conductor with a ring lug and stainless
steel nut and bolt. No 4
F4 SUNDRY STEEL
F4.1 Supply and install small quantities of Hot dip

galvanised steel supports for cable racking and
equipment.
F4.1.1 Fabricated brackets not exceeding 5kg including

fixing and fastenings No 4
Carried forward
Page 11
ITEM PAYMENT SHORT DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT
NO. REFERS
Brought forward
F5 SMALL POWER AND LIGHTING
F5.1 Supply, offload and install the following equipment

and related conduting/wiring.
F5.1.1 2 x 28W T5 IP65 luminaire complete with

triphosphor lamps, electronic ballasts and all
fixing brackets. Type BEKA Vapourline VLN
2*28W ECG-T5 or equal approved No 11
F5.1.2 IP65 Socket outlet to SANS 164-1, mounted in

fire pump house No 1
F5.1.3 IP65 light switch No 3
F5.1.4 Surface mounted Bosal type conduiting for fire

pump house, as per drawing
1136544-1-B01-M-LA-0011-01 Sum 1
F5.1.5 House wiring for lighting in fire pump house, as

per drawing 1136544-1-B01-M-LA-0011-01 Sum 1
F6 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS & PANELS

Manufacture, deliver to site, offload, install
and commission the following to specification:-
F6.1 Control room fire control panel FCP-01,

complete as per drawings
1136544-1-B01-M-GA-0005-01 and
1136544-1-B01-M-SD-0001 Sum 1
F6.2 Fire pump house fire control panel FCP-02,

complete as per drawings
1136544-1-B01-M-GA-0006-01,
1136544-1-B01-M-SD-0002,
F7 1136544-1-B01-M-SL-0001-01, Sum 1
F7.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Meggar, continuity and functional Testing, etc

F7.2 as defined within the Specification Sum 1
Certificate of Compliance to SANS 10142-1,

F7.3 certified by Master Installation Electrician Sum 1
Provisional sum for electrical dayworks PC 1
TOTAL FOR SECTION F : TO SUMMARY

.
Page 12
NO. REFERS
G1 INSTRUMENT CABLES AND TERMINATIONS
G1.1 Deliver, offload and install within sleeves, cable rack

or ducts the following TYPE S2 BLACK
PVC/SWA/PVC/XLPE Cu Dekoron Instrument
cables (ABERDARE M877 / M755 or approved)
G1.1.1 1.5mm² 24-Pair m 100

G1.1.2 1.5mm² 8-Pair m 350
G1.1.3 1.5mm² 2-Pair m 650
G1.1.4 1.0mm² 1-Pair m 80
G1.1.5 1.0mm² 7 Core m 30
G1.2 Gland, terminate and label the following TYPE S2

cables within a SAFE AREA (i.e. CW gland)
G1.2.1 1.5mm² 24-Pair No. 2

G1.2.2 1.5mm² 8-Pair No. 6
G1.2.3 1.5mm² 2-Pair No. 8
G1.2.4 1.0mm² 1-Pair No. 6
G1.2.5 1.0mm² 7 Core No. 2
G1.3 Gland, terminate and label the following TYPE

S2 cables within a HAZARDOUS AREA (i.e.
EIW gland)
G1.3.1 1.5mm² 8-Pair No. 2

G1.3.2 1.0mm² 2-Pair No. 4
G1.3.3 1.0mm² 1-Pair No. 2
G2 INSTRUMENTS
G2.1 Supply install and commission the following

instrumentation & support
G2.1.1 Hydrocarbon Vapour Detector, as per

datasheet 1136544-000-DS-0043;
support measured elsewhere No. 4
G2.1.2 Hydrocarbon Vapour Detector support as per

drawing 1136544-1-001-M-DE-0008-01 No. 4
G2.1.3 Foam tank level transmitter as per datasheet

1136544-000-DS-0044 No. 1
G2.1.4 Pressure transmitter as per datasheet

1136544-000-DS-0046 No 2
Carried forward
Page 12A
NO. REFERS
Brought forward
G2.1.4 Design and supply smoke detectors for fire

pump house with smoke detectors located as
typically shown in drawing
1136544-1-B01-E-LA-0002-01.
Specialist supplier to ensure that the system
complies with SANS 10139 & SANS 50054.
Ziton or equal approved system to be supplied Sum 1
G2.1.5 Install and commission fire detection system Sum 1
TOTAL FOR SECTION G : TO SUMMARY

.
Page 13
SECTION H : STEELWORK
NO. REFERS
SABS SECTION H: STEELWORK

1200H
H1 PSHA STEELWORK TO PLATFORM TO CONCRETE COLUMN
PSHC
H1.1 Supply, deliver and erect the following structural steelwork items to
the platform fixed to the concrete column, including GALVANIZING
to specification and fixing bolts and preperation of shop drawings.
a) Hot rolled section less than 30 kg/m mass in beams, columns t 13.00
and posts including cleats, endplates, etc.
H1.2 Supply and install standard mentis handrails (painted yellow and m 120
black) to platforms (GALVANIZED)
H1.3 Catladder as per detail No 4
H1.4 Supply and install RS40 (50x5.0) galvanised mentis grating (fully m² 50
banded with kickplates) to access platform.
H2 PSHA STEELWORK TO PIPE SUPPORTS

PSHC
the pipe supports, including GALVANIZING to specification and
fixing bolts and preperation of shop drawings.
a) Hot rolled section less than 30 kg/m mass in beams, t 9.80

endplates, etc for pipe supports inside culvert.
b) Hot rolled section less than 30 kg/m mass in beams, endplates, t 6.5
etc for pipe supports at pipe servitude area
c) Hot rolled section less than 30 kg/m mass in beams, endplates, t 4.8
etc for pipe supports inside pumphouse
d) M16 galvanized chemical anchors inside culvert No 1500.0
e) Round barto top of steel members. t 0.8

Ro
f) Flatbars, including fish tail lugs. t 0.8
g) M20 grade 8.8 galvanized holding down bolts to pipe supports No 400.0
inside pipe survitude
H3 PSHA STEELWORK TO STAIRCASE INSIDE PUMP HOUSE

PSHC
the staircase inside the pump house, including GALVANIZING to
specification and fixing bolts and preperation of shop drawings.
a) Hot rolled section less than 30 kg/m mass in beams, endplates, t 3.50
etc.
b) Supply and install standard mentis handrails (painted yellow m 55

and black) to access stairs and gantry platform.
CARRIED FORWARDCARRIED FORWARDCARRIED FORWARD -

Page 14
SECTION H : STEELWORK
NO. REFERS
Brought forward -
c) Supply and install 900 wide standard mentis treads to access No. 55
stair (GALVANISED)
d) Supply and install RS40 (50x5.0) galvanised mentis grating m² 25

(fully banded with kickplates) to access platform.
e) Galvanised from 2.5mm sheet metal RWDP. m 25
TOTAL FOR SECTION H: TO SUMMARY -

Page 15

NO. REFERS
I.1. PIPE-WORK
Supply, measure, fabricate, apply internal and external lining, install, test and inspect the following:
I.1.1 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH XS, SMLS
a) 25 NB m 36
b) 50 NB m 15
I.1.2 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH 40, SMLS

a) 100 NB m 7
I.1.3 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB

a) 25 NB EA 32
b) 50 NB EA 6
I.1.4 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB

a) 100 NB EA 4
I.1.5 TEE ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB

a) 25 NB EA 2
I.1.6 TEE RED ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB

a) 100x50 NB EA 2
I.1.7 RED CONC ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB

a) 25x15 NB EA 4
b) 50x25 NB EA 2
I.1.8 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF XS BORE STL A105

a) 25 NB EA 8
b) 50 NB EA 2
I.2. GASKETS AND BOLTS

Supply, Install, Test, Protect and Commission the following:
I.2.1 GASKET COMPRESSED FIBER/NITRILE 1.5MM THK
a) 25 NB EA 8
b) 50 NB EA 2
I.2.2 BOLT SET CL 150

a) 25 NB EA 8
b) 50 NB EA 2
I.3. VALVES
Supply, Install, Test, Protect and Commission the following valves:
I.3.1 FULL SWING CHECK VALVE CL 150 RF STL A216 WCBS/S 316L TRIM
a) 25 NB EA 2
I.3.2 BALL VALVE CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB CB S/S 316L TRIM (SHORT PATTERN)
a) 25 NB EA 2
b) 50 NB EA 2
Carried forward -
Page 16
SECTION K: FIRE PROTECTION

NO. REFERS
Brought forward -
I.4. EQUIPMENT
Supply, install, test, commission, handover and provide training for the following:
I.4.1 NFPA 20 Vertical turbine fire water pumps
a) NFPA 20 Vertical turbine fire water pumps EA 1
b) Fire Water Pumps rated capacity 700 m3/h, differential head EA 2 Incl. above
of 126m
c) Right Angled Gear Box for Fire Water Pump with flexible drive EA 2 Incl. above
shaft and shaft guard
d) Diesel Engine for Fire Water Pump with torsional coupling EA 2 Incl. above
and sea water cooling loop
e) Fuel tank EA 2 Incl. above
f) Industiral silencer and exhaust connection EA 2 Incl. above
g) Automatic relief valve EA 2 Incl. above
h) Discharge pressure gauge EA 2 Incl. above
i) Main relief valve and waste cone EA 2 Incl. above
j) Test Arrangement Flow Meter EA 1 Incl. above
TOTAL FOR SECTION I : TO SUMMARY -

Page 17

NO. REFERS
J.1 PIPE-WORK
J.1.1 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH XS, SMLS

a) 25 NB m 1
b) 50 NB m 23
J.1.2 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH STD, SMLS
a) 80 NB m 11
J.1.3 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH 40, SMLS

a) 100 NB m 56
J.1.4 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH 20, SMLS

a) 200 NB m 73
b) 250 NB m 188
c) 300 NB m 31
J.1.5 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB

a) 80 NB EA 10
J.1.6 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB

a) 200 NB EA 8
J.1.7 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB

a) 100 NB EA 13
J.1.8 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 200 NB EA 26
b) 250 NB EA 8
c) 50 NB EA 8
J.1.9 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB

a) 250 NB EA 6
J.1.10 TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB

a) 300 NB EA 6

a) 200 NB EA 2

a) 200 NB EA 2
J.1.13 TEE RED ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 200x100 NB EA 4

a) 250 NB EA 1

a) 250x200 NB EA 6

a) 300 NB EA 1

a) 300 NB EA 1

a) 300x200 NB EA 3
b) 300x250 NB EA 1
Carried forward -
Page 18

NO. REFERS
Brought forward -
J.1.19 WELD-O-LET SCH XS STL A105

a) 300x25 NB EA 4
b) 300x50 NB EA 2
c) 300x80 NB EA 2
J.1.20 THRD-O-LET SCH XS STL A105

a) 25x15 NB EA 4
b) 25x15 NB EA 4
c) 100x20 NB EA 14
J.1.21 RED CONC ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
a) 80x50 NB EA 2
J.1.22 RED CONC ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 250x200 NB EA 1
J.1.23 RED ECC ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 250x200 NB EA 1
J.1.24 RED CONC ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 300x250 NB EA 1
J.1.25 RED ECC ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 350x300 NB EA 2
J.1.26 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF XS BORE STL A105

a) 25 NB EA 4
J.1.27 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF STD BORE STL A105

a) 80 NB EA 4
J.1.28 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF 40 BORE STL A105

a) 100 NB EA 52
J.1.29 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF 20 BORE STL A105

a) 200 NB EA 77
b) 250 NB EA 53
c) 300 NB EA 38
d) 350 NB EA 2
J.1.30 FLG BLIND CL 150 RF STL A105

a) 25 NB EA 4
b) 200 NB EA 2
J.2. GASKETS AND BOLTS

J.2.1 GASKET COMPRESSED FIBER/NITRILE 1.5MM THK

a) 25 NB EA 8
b) 80 NB EA 4
c) 100 NB EA 29
d) 200 NB EA 65
e) 250 NB EA 28
f) 300 NB EA 28
g) 350 NB EA 2
Carried forward -
Page 19

NO. REFERS
Brought forward -
J.2.2 BOLT SET CL 150

a) 25 NB EA 8
b) 80 NB EA 4
c) 100 NB EA 29
d) 200 NB EA 65
e) 250 NB EA 28
f) 300 NB EA 28
g) 350 NB EA 2
J.3. VALVES
J.3.1 CHECK VALVE CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB (WAFER)

a) 200 NB EA 4
b) 300 NB EA 2
J.3.2 BALL VALVE CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB CB S/S 316L TRIM (SHORT PATTERN)
a) 25 NB EA 4
J.3.3 GATE VALVE CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB CB S/S 316L TRIM
a) 200 NB EA 7
b) 250 NB EA 1
J.3.4 BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGED CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB CB S/S 316L TRIM
a) 100 NB EA 1
b) 200 NB EA 10
c) 300 NB EA 3
J.4. EQUIPMENT
J.4.1 Control Valve Buttweld/Flanged

a) 100 NB EA 1
b) 200 NB EA 1
c) 200 NB EA 1
d) 200 NB EA 1
e) 300 NB EA 1
J.4.2 AIR ELIMINATOR

a) 50 NB EA 1
J.4.3 FLOW METER

a) 200 NB EA 1
J.4.4 ORIFICE PLATE

a) 300 NB EA 1
J.4.5 Waste Cone

a) 300x200 NB EA 2
Supply, Install, Test, Protect and Commission the following Hydrants:
J.4.6 Fire hydrants

a) Hydrant, 200 NB Manifold with 4 x 65mm flanged Hydrant EA 4
valves with instantaneous female couplings to SANS 1128-1
b) Pump in Connection, 200 NB Manifold with 2 x 65mm EA 2

instantaneous male couplings to SANS 1128-1
TOTAL FOR SECTION J : TO SUMMARY -

Page 20

NO. REFERS
K.1 PIPE-WORK
K.1.1 PIPE, A312 316L, SCH 40S, SMLS
a) 25 NB m 2
b) 40 NB m 1
c) 50 NB m 1
d) 80 NB m 29
K.1.2 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH 40, SMLS

a) 100 NB m 3
K.1.3 PIPE, API 5L GR B, SCH 20, SMLS

a) 200 NB m 340
K.1.4 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403 316/316L

a) 25 NB EA 4
b) 50 NB EA 21
K.1.5 90 LR ELL LR ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 200 NB EA 15
K.1.6 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403 316/316L

a) 80 NB EA 6
K.1.7 TEE RED ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403 316/316L

a) 100 NB EA 2
b) 200 NB EA 1
K.1.8 TEE RED ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB

a) 200x100 NB EA 4
K.1.9 RED CONC ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403 316/316L

a) 80x40 NB EA 4
b) 80x50 NB EA 2
K.1.10 RED ECC ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403 316/316L

a) 80x50 NB EA 2
K.1.11 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF 40S BORE A182 316/316L

a) 25 NB EA 4
b) 50 NB EA 1
c) 80 NB EA 40
K.1.12 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF 40 BORE STL A105

a) 100 NB EA 4
K.1.13 FLG WELD NECK CL 150 RF 20 BORE STL A105

a) 200 NB EA 80
K.1.14 FLG BLIND CL 150 RF STL A105

a) 200 NB EA 2
Carried forward 0.00

Page 21

NO. REFERS
Brought forward 0.00
K.2. GASKETS AND BOLTS

K.2.1 GASKET COMPRESSED FIBER/NITRILE 1.5MM THK

a) 25 NB EA 4
b) 50 NB EA 1
c) 80 NB EA 36
d) 100 NB EA 4
e) 200 NB EA 42
K.2.2 BOLT SET CL 150

a) 25 NB EA 4
b) 50 NB EA 1
c) 80 NB EA 36
d) 100 NB EA 4
e) 200 NB EA 42
K.3. VALVES
K.3.1 CHECK VALVE CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB (WAFER)
a) 80 NB EA 5
K.3.2 BALL VALVE CL 150 RF A351-GR.CF8M S/S 316L TRIM (SHORT PATTERN)
a) 80 NB EA 11
K.4. EQUIPMENT
K.4.1 RELIEF VALVE, FLG, 150LB
a) 25x50 NB EA 1
K.4.2 IND 100FL

a) 100x40 NB EA 4
Supply, Install, Test, Protect and Commission the following equipment:

K.4.3 Storage Tank
a) 10000 l LDPE storage tank for foam concentrate EA 1
K.4.4 Foam Concentrate Circulation Pump

a) Positive displacement foam circulation pump EA 1
K.4.5 Monitor with Foam Cannon

a) 6 way operation electro hydraulic remote controlled monitor EA 2
b) Control Panel to operate two monitors with all functions EA 1
K.4.6 Storage Tank

a) Foam Concentrate litre 9000
TOTAL FOR SECTION K : TO SUMMARY 0.00

Page 22

NO. REFERS
L.1 EQUIPMENT
Supply, Install, and Certify the following Portable equipment:
L.1.1 Portable Extinguishers

a) 9kg DCP EA 13
b) 6.8 kg DCP EA 1
L.1.2 Wheeled Extinguishers

a) 75 kG DCP EA 4
L.1.3 Portable Foam Monitors

a) Portable foam monitor EA 2
L.1.4 Hose Boxes

a) Hose boxes completed with three (3) 30 m 38mm EA 6
hoses,couplers and branch pipes
L1.5 Supply and Install the following:
L.1.5.1 Signage
a) Fire safety signs LOT 1
TOTAL FOR SECTION L : TO SUMMARY 0.00

Page 23
TRANSNET GROUP CAPITAL

CONTRACT NO. 1126901.001
THE DESIGN 0F A FIREFIGHTING AND PROTECTION SYSTEM (CENTRAL FOAM INJECTION SYSTEM) TO B100 LIQUID BULK
BERTH AND THE BUNKER BARGE BERTH : BERTH B100 FIRE PROTECTION
NO. REFERS
M.1 REVIEW OF THE DRAWINGS
M.1.1 Review and develop current firefighting system designs to AFC Sum 1
M.1.2 Perform Pipe Stress Analysis Sum 1
TOTAL FOR SECTION L : TO SUMMARY 0.00

ENQUIRY NUMBER: 1126901-M001
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS: SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF FIREFIGHTING AND PROTECTION SYSTEM
FOR BERTH B100
PART C3: SCOPE OF WORK
Document reference Title No of

pages
C3.1 Employer’s Works Information: Supply and Installation of 50

Firefighting and Protection systems for Berth B100
Total number of pages 50
NEC3 Contract PAGE 2 C3

FORM: PRO-FAT-0222 Rev 0 Part C3: The Scope of Work Rev B
FOR BERTH B100
C3.1: EMPLOYER’S WORKS INFORMATION

CONTENTS
C3.1: EMPLOYER’S WORKS INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 3
SECTION 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 5
1 Description of the works ......................................................................................................................... 5

1.1 Executive Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 5
1.2 Scope of Works ................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Location of the site.............................................................................................................................................. 8
1.4 Employer’s objectives .......................................................................................................................................... 9
1.5 Interpretation and terminology .......................................................................................................................... 9
2 ENGINEERING AND THE CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN .......................................................................... 12

2.1 Employer’s Design ............................................................................................................................................. 12
2.2 Parts of the Works which the Contractor is to Design ...................................................................................... 12
2.3 Use of Contractor’s Design ................................................................................................................................ 16
2.4 Record Drawings, Operating Manuals and Maintenance Schedules ................................................................ 17
3 CONSTRUCTION..................................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Particular Construction Constraints .................................................................................................................. 19
3.2 Employer’s Requirements ................................................................................................................................. 20
3.3 Facilities provided by the Contractor ................................................................................................................ 24
3.4 Survey Control and Setting out of the Works .................................................................................................... 25
3.5 Underground Services and Infrastructure ......................................................................................................... 25
3.6 Giving Notice of Works to be Covered Up ......................................................................................................... 26
3.7 Hook-Up to Existing Works ............................................................................................................................... 26
3.8 Temporary Works and Site Services .................................................................................................................. 26
3.9 Completion, Testing, Commissioning and Correction of Defects ...................................................................... 26
4 PLANT AND MATERIALS STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP ......................................................... 30

4.1 Plant and Materials .......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.2 Investigation, Survey and Site Clearance .......................................................................................................... 30
4.3 Interpretation of standardised specifications, Project specifications and national standards ......................... 30
4.4 Building works ................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.5 Civil and structural engineering works .............................................................................................................. 31
4.6 Electrical and mechanical engineering works ................................................................................................... 32
4.7 Fire Engineering Works ..................................................................................................................................... 33
5 LIST OF DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................... 34

5.1 Drawings issued by the Employer ..................................................................................................................... 34
6 MANAGEMENT AND START-UP ........................................................................................................... 40

6.1 Management Meetings .................................................................................................................................... 40
6.2 Documentation Control..................................................................................................................................... 41
6.3 Safety Risk Management .................................................................................................................................. 41
6.4 Environmental Management ............................................................................................................................ 42
6.5 Quality Assurance Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 44
6.6 Programming and Progress Reporting .............................................................................................................. 46
6.7 Contractor’s Management, Supervision and Key People .................................................................................. 48
6.8 Training Workshops and Documentation ......................................................................................................... 48

FORM: PRO-FAT-0222 Rev 03 Part C3: The Scope of Works Rev B
FOR BERTH B100
6.9 Contract Change Management......................................................................................................................... 49

6.10 Provision of Bonds and Guarantees .................................................................................................................. 49
8 PLANT AND MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................... 50
List of figures
Figure 1 : Overview of the entire site development for the Fire Protection System .................................................... 6
Figure 2 : Site location ................................................................................................................................................ 8
List of Annexures
ANNEXURE A: TENDER SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS
ANNEXURE B: CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: DOC-STD-0001
ANNEXURE C: HEALTH AND SAFETY SPECIFICATION: 1126901-SP-0001
ANNEXURE D: PROJECT CONSTRUCTION ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PROGRAMME (CEMPr) - 1126901-RPT-
00013
ANNEXURE E: GENERAL QUALITY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
ANNEXURE F: INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS POLICY AND MANAGEMENT PLAN ACM-IR-POL-001

FOR BERTH B100
SECTION 1
1 Description of the works
1.1 Executive Overview
Transnet National Ports Authority (TNPA) made a decision to decommission the Port of Port Elizabeth
due to space restrictions, not limited to its close proximity to the residential areas. The existing liquid
Berth B100 at the Port of Ngqura was identified as a new facility to cater for some of the operations from
Port of Port Elizabeth. TNPA requires the supply and installation of a firefighting and protection system
to support the development of a new liquid bulk facility at the Port of Ngqura so that the existing facility
at the Port of Port Elizabeth can be decommissioned. The works that the Contractor is to perform
involves the design (where application), supply, installation and commissioning of the firefighting
protection systems associated with a complete new firefighting system for the berth B100. The Employer
is Transnet Capital Projects (TCP) and the Owner of the works is Transnet National Ports Authority
(TNPA). Further descriptions of the Site are included under Part C4: Site Information.
The Contractor provides the following for the works:

i. Review and develop current firefighting system designs to AFC (Approved for construction) and
will include shop detailing and approval by a professionally registered engineer with the
Engineering Council of South Africa(ECSA),
ii. Undertake transient flow and pipe stress analysis using specialised software to verify first
principle calculations and locations of supporting members,
iii. Detailed design, procurement, installation testing and commissioning of a high volume vertical
lift diesel driven sea water fire pumps,
iv. Procurement, installation, testing and commissioning of a foam induction system,
v. Supply, site fabrication, internal and external lining, erection and testing of firefighting foam
solution and fire water main reticulation pipe-work,
vi. Design, procurement, installation, testing and commissioning of remotely controlled monitors
with self-aspirating foam cannons,
vii. Construction of monitor towers with cast in foam supply pipe, cat-ladder, platform and handrails,
viii. Construction of pipe and cable conduits, trenches and supports,
ix. Procurement, installation, testing and commissioning of a hydrocarbon gas detection system,
x. Supply of portable firefighting equipment,
xi. Issuing of Certificate of Compliance, by Master Installation electrician for Zone 1 classified areas
xii. Handover documentation including as-built drawings, quality data books and equipment
operating and maintenance manuals,
xiii. Testing and commissioning,
xiv. Performance testing
xv. Training and technology transfer

FOR BERTH B100
Figure 1 : Overview of the entire site development for the Fire Protection System

FOR BERTH B100
1.2 Scope of Works

The works comprise a new hydrocarbon gas detection system and firefighting system for Berth B100
with a fire pump station, fire water piping system, foam storage and induction system, foam solution
piping system and two fixed monitors with foam cannons.
Fire water for the bulk liquids berth B100 will be supplied by two sea water vertical turbine fire pumps.
The pumps will be diesel engine driven and the pump installation shall comply with NFPA 20.
The fire water main will be kept full and pressurised by municipal water supplied to the site. A backflow
preventer will ensure that no sea water is pumped into the municipal system.
Two large monitors mounted on ten meter high towers will provide the main firefighting capability to
protect the marine load arms and manifold area on any ship that is berthed. Supplementary firefighting
capability will be in the form of hydrants, hoses, portable monitors and foam equipment and portable
extinguishers. In additions to the supplementary firefighting capability above, booster connections will
be provided for the fire department to pump into the fire water main from either fire trucks or firefighting
boats.
A hydrocarbon gas detection system to be installed will enable the early detection and prevention of
fires. Fire alarms located on the Berth and in the control room will enable personnel to remotely start
the fire pumps in the event of a fire. The fire pumps, foam induction system and foam monitors will be
remotely controllable from the control room.
The Works that the Contractor is to perform involve civil, structural, mechanical and electrical works as
covered in this document, the mechanical and electrical specifications and technical drawings as
referenced under Annexure A. The Contractor provides the following:
i. The establishment on site facilities for the Contractor and the provision of the necessary,
personnel and equipment.
ii. Supply of Plant and Material required for the works and as detailed on the drawings and
technical documentation referenced in Appendix A
iii. Construction of various pipe supports, pipe culverts and pipe bridges
iv. Construction of two 10 m high concrete foam monitor towers with steel cat ladders and access
platforms.
v. Construction of electrical and data sleeves and manholes.
vi. Site measurement, workshop fabrication, testing, lining and coating of carbon steel piping.
vii. Site measurement, workshop fabrication and testing of stainless steel piping.
viii. Design, supply and installation of the fire pump, engine, fuel system and all ancillary equipment
ix. Design, supply and installation of the pump caisson
x. Design, supply and installation of the inlet screens and net
xi. Design, supply and installation of the fixed monitors with hydraulic control unit and remote
electrical controls in the control room
xii. Installation of fire and foam piping systems
xiii. Supply and installation of the required Motor Control Centre’s (MCC’s) as required for the supply
and control of all motors, valves and field instrumentation in the fire pump house
xiv. Supply and installation of the Hydrocarbon gas detection on the jetty
xv. Supply and installation of the Control panel and electrical distribution board in the in the control
room
xvi. Supply, installation and termination of cables and associated glands for all LV supply, control,
xvii. Supply and installation of earthing and signal cables associated with the above.
xviii. Issuing of Certificate of Compliance for each of the MCC’ and LV DB’s
xix. Issuing of Certificate of Compliance, by Master Installation electrician for Zone 1 classified areas

FOR BERTH B100
xx. Handover documentation including as-built drawings, quality data books and equipment
operating and maintenance manuals,
xxi. Testing and commissioning of the entire fire protection and hydrocarbon detection system.
xxii. Performance testing
xxiii. Training and technology transfer
xxiv. The making good of defects in the works
xxv. The removal of equipment, site establishment and the final tidying of the site upon completion
of the Works.
The Contractor provides the works in accordance with the technical, health and safety, environmental,
quality, industrial relations and programming requirements as set out in the Works Information.
The site is categorized as Zone 8 “Port Area” under the Coega IDZ Zone Overview, Tenants and Site
Reservations. The permitted activities in the “Port Area” are limited to port related activities only. The
area is currently used by Transnet for import and export operations.
1.3 Location of the site

The Port of Ngqura is located within the Nelson Mandela Bay Municipality in the Eastern Cape, South
Africa. The site easily accessible via the existing N2 Highway and the Port Elizabeth Airport is 20
minutes from the Port. There is adequate and efficient roads and rail to enable logistics requirements.
The Port of Ngqura is capable of handling container, dry and liquid bulk vessels. The location is latitude
33˚ 48’S, longitude 25˚ 41’E. Further descriptions of the Site are included under Part C4: Site
Information.
Figure 2 : Site location

FOR BERTH B100
1.4 Employer’s objectives

The Employer’s objectives are to achieve completion of the works by the Completion Date whilst still
maintaining the highest environmental, quality and safety standards and minimising disruptions to
ongoing port and terminal operations.
Emphasis is placed on the Employer’s commitment to environmental management and safety and their
objectives of “Zero Harm”, of achieving a zero LTI and a zero environmental legal contravention
construction contract. Furthermore, it is emphasised that the Works fall within an environmentally
sensitive and protected zone and as such, it is the Employer’s objective to ensure full compliance with
the guidelines and recommendations of the Department of Environmental Affairs Environmental
Authorisation, Transnet’s Construction Environmental Management Plan, Standard Environmental
Specifications and all Permits and Licenses authorised by the relevant Authorities.
The Employer’s project specific objectives to this work information are to:
i. Provide a Fire Protection System to Berth B100 that enable the use of the berth for bulk liquids.
ii. Ensure that the security requirements of TNPA Security are paramount in the construction of
the facility.
iii. Limit the disruption to operations within the Port of Ngqura.
The Site is located inside the Port of Ngqura, as described in further detail in Part C4: Site Information.
1.5 Interpretation and terminology

1.5.1 For the purposes of this contract for all matters regarding technical decisions, Acceptance of
Engineering related technical documents, Testing, Commissioning and any matters pertaining to the
context of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, the Contractor is required to cooperate with the
Employer’s Engineers/Professional Engineers as per Core Clause 25.1 and Core Clause 14.2 as
delegated by the Project Manager and the Supervisor, for the former and as applicable in the context.
The instructions received by the Contractor shall be interpreted as lawful in matters pertaining to the
former if the instruction has been endorsed by both the Project Manager or Supervisor, and the
Employer’s Engineers/Professional Engineers as applicable in the context. The Employer’s Engineers
shall be named post award of the contract and prior to commencement of the Works. The Contractor
is further advised that, in compliance to NEC3 ECC Core Clause 25.1, that co-operation with the
Employers Engineers and other representatives of the Employer (Others) is a requirement of this
contract and the Contractor is to allow, grant and facilitate all reasonable access that may be required
by the Employer’s Engineers and Others as applicable, for the provision of the Works.
1.5.2 The following terminology is used in this Works Information:
Term Meaning given to the term

Drawings The latest revision of the construction drawings

FOR BERTH B100
Term Meaning given to the term
The document/s forming part of the contract, in which methods of

executing the various items of work, and the nature and quality of the
Specification/s Materials to be supplied are described. The specification includes
technical schedules and drawings attached thereto as well as all
samples and patterns interpretation of incorporated documentation.
As defined in the NEC3 ECC contract. Responsible for checking that the
Supervisor works are constructed in accordance with the Drawings and the
Specification.
As defined in the NEC3 ECC contract. Responsible for contractual

Project Manager
matters, cost and time.
As defined in the NEC3 ECC contract, the company engaged to

Contractor
construct the works.
works As defined in the NEC3 ECC contract. That which is to be constructed.
1.5.3 The following abbreviations are used in this Works Information:
Abbreviation Meaning Given to the Abbreviation
B-BBEE Broad Based Black Economic Empowerment

CD Compact Disc
CEMP Construction Environmental Management Plan
CIRP Contractor’s Industrial Relations Practitioner
CM Construction Manager
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Works for State Road
COLTO
Authorities, 1998 (as amended)
CPM Critical Path Method
DEA Department of Environmental Affairs
ECC NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract
EMPr Environmental Management Programme (as authorized by DEA)

EO Environmental Officer
IRCC Industrial Relations Co-ordinating Committee

Native Original electronic file format of documentation
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
PIRM Project Industrial Relations Manager

FOR BERTH B100
Abbreviation Meaning Given to the Abbreviation
PIRPMP Project Industrial Relations Policy and Management Plan

PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PQP Project Quality Plan
PSCM Procurement and Supply Chain Management
PSSM Project Site Safety Manager
QA Quality Assurance
QCP Quality Control Plan
SANS South African National Standards
SHE Safety, Health and Environment
SH&EO Safety, Health and Environmental Officer
SOC State Owned Company
TGC Transnet Group Capital
TNPA Transnet National Ports Authority

FOR BERTH B100
2 ENGINEERING AND THE CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN

2.1 Employer’s Design
The Employer’s design for the works covers the mechanical and electrical design works required for the
construction of fire protection infrastructure to support a new liquid bulk handling facility. This includes
the design of the pump house, the foam system and fire water piping. The Employer’s design comprises:
i. Process design of the system
ii. Layout and specification for the vertical turbine fire pump system
iii. Electrical design but excluding the pump engine control panels
iv. Main control panel to be located in the control room for remote control of the fire pumps, foam
valves and elevated foam monitors
v. Control system for the hydrocarbon gas detection and alarm system
vi. Site layout and locations of equipment
vii. Architectural and structural engineering design of the pump house and control room buildings
viii. Civil and structural design of the support plinths for the fire pump, gear box, pump caisson,
diesel engines and the diesel fuel tanks
ix. Civil engineering design of pipe culverts and bases
x. Structural design of pipe supports, pipe bridges, culvert covers and foam monitor towers
xi. Mechanical engineering design of all pipe-work
xii. Specifications for all valves, instrumentation and fire protection equipment
It must be noted that the design was done from first principle calculations and will require design using
specialist transient flow and pipe stress analysis software to simulate operational conditions. This will
be done after vendor information is available for the pump/drive arrangement and foam system.Relevant
construction specifications are listed and included under section 4 and also drawings and technical
documents are listed under Annexure A.
The Employer grants the Contractor a licence to use the copyright in design data presented to the
Contractor for the purpose of the Works (and the Contractor’s obligation under paragraph 2.2 of the
Employer’s Works Information) ONLY.
2.2 Parts of the Works which the Contractor is to Design

2.2.1 Permanent Works
The Contractor appoints suitably qualified and experienced engineers and designers, professionally
registered with ECSA to carry out the designs and drawings for the following permanent works based
on the Employer’s specifications and designs:
i. Fire pump caisson and support detail
ii. Pump caisson water intake screen
iii. Vertical turbine fire pump installation in accordance with NFPA 20 including
o Vertical turbine fire pump designed for the specified duty
o Air eliminator on pump discharge
o Right angled gear box
o Drive shaft to suit selected pump and layout
o Diesel engine
o Diesel engine fuel system
o Diesel engine air intake and exhaust systems
o Diesel engine cooling water system using sea water from pump discharge and return
to the sea

FOR BERTH B100
o Fire pump main relief valve

o Fire pump pressure sustaining valve
o Fire pump test arrangement flow meter
o Fire pump engine controller
iv. Shop fabrication details for structural steel
v. Detail equipment drawings
vi. Transient flow and pipe stress analysis
vii. Verify and sign off on current design,
viii. Final Design report and AFC drawings (in native copies)
ix. Shop fabrication details for pipe-work based on Contractor’s site measurements and piping
isometrics provided by the Employer.
The responsibility and liability for the designs will vest solely with the Contractor. The provisions of
Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 apply in respect of the appointment of specialist subcontractors and OEM’s for
the execution of the above works.
2.2.2 Temporary Works
Temporary works are all works other than the permanent works indicated in the project specifications,
drawings and associated contract documentation. These include but are not limited to infrastructure to
be removed from the Site at the end of construction, protection of new and existing
infrastructure/services, dismantling existing infrastructure/services where specified and the like.
Temporary works shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
i. Designs, drawings and method statements for temporary works pertaining to the fire protection
system, to include, but not limited to:
o Temporary support work and formwork.
o Temporary scaffolding system
ii. The Contractor provides detailed method statements for acceptance prior to the execution of
the following critical activities:
o All working at heights
o All rigging and lifting activities
o All marine work involving specialist divers
o Handling of bulk consumables including diesel and foam concentrate
The above-listed method statements shall include risk assessments and shall especially cover the
following:
i. Protection measures to be provided for activities being undertaken above or in close proximity
of new and existing infrastructure/services
ii. Permitting procedures to cover all excavations, including in particular within the port area, taking
account also of the requirements of the port operator.
iii. The securing of the site where installations are being done in close proximity to ongoing port
operations.
The Contractor is responsible for the overall integration of the design of the temporary works with the
design of the Employer.
All temporary works shall be designed by the Contractor and shall remain the Contractor’s responsibility.
The Contractor appoints suitably qualified, experienced and professionally registered engineers and
designers, where applicable, to carry out such works and shall indemnify and hold indemnified the

FOR BERTH B100
Project Manager and Employer against any claims and actions that may arise out of the temporary
works.
Any temporary works that may be necessary should be approved by the Project Manager prior to
construction. Any temporary work submitted is required in a format of both calculations and drawings.
The temporary works shall be structurally adequate and the foundations adequate with no settlement.
The Contractor shall be responsible for full compliance with all codes of practice, safety, professional
procedures, checking, approvals and requirements of the Construction Regulations with regards to the
temporary works.
2.2.3 General
All temporary or permanent works designed by the Contractor shall remain the Contractor’s
responsibility.
The Contractor appoints suitably qualified, experienced and professionally registered engineers and
designers, to be accepted by the Employer, to carry out detailed designs for the permanent and where
applicable temporary works, in accordance with this Works Information, the drawings and the project
specifications. The Contractor indemnifies and holds indemnified the Project Manager and Employer
against any claims and actions that may arise out of the design and construction of such permanent and
temporary works.
The Contractor is responsible for full compliance with all codes of practice, safety and professional
procedures, checking, site approval requirements and application of the construction regulations with
regards to the temporary and permanent works.
The Contractor ensures that his designs are fully integrated with the Employer’s design.
Where temporary or permanent works are located close to or within infrastructure or property owned by
others, e.g. Transnet, Telkom, CDC or other service and utility owners as may be the case, the
Contractor is responsible for the following, but not limited to:
i. Liaising with the relevant parties to ascertain impacts on existing property or on any planned
activities. Measures to eliminate or mitigate such impacts shall be developed and agreed to with
all affected parties.
ii. Ensuring compliance with the applicable standards, procedures and requirements of such third
parties.
iii. Identify requirements and provide protection of all infrastructure owned by such third parties.
For both permanent and temporary works the following applies

i. All calculations must be authenticated and authorised by Professional Engineers or
Technologists registered with the Engineering Council of South Africa in accordance with ECSA
guidelines.
ii. The Contractor submits all design calculations and drawings for all permanent Works as well
as all temporary Works as listed below in section 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 to the Project Manager for
acceptance by the Employer’s Engineers and/or Employer’s Consultant
iii. The Contractor submits all detailed drawings and workshop details for all designs, both
Contractor’s designs and Employer’s designs, to the Project Manager for acceptance by the
Employer’s Engineers and/or Employer’s Consultant
iv. The Contractor is responsible for full compliance with all codes of practice, safety and
professional procedures, professional codes of conducts and requirement of the construction
regulations with regards to permanent Works as listed under section 2.2.2 of the Employer’s
Works Information as well as all temporary Works.

FOR BERTH B100
v. The Contractor is wholly responsible for all design coordination, integration and liaison activities
involved the Works, and shall take all measures necessary and make all arrangements for
activities such as meetings, inspections, endorsements, and any other activities required for the
timeous completion of the Works and to the appropriate quality. When these activities require
the involvement of the Employer’s Professional Engineering team or any other stakeholders,
the Contractor is required to make these arrangements with due consideration of the Employer’s
Professional Engineering team’s availability and the availability of other stakeholders.
vi. The Contractor is responsible in his design for the overall integration of the design of the Works
with the design of the Employer.
vii. The Contractor shall thus be wholly accountable and responsible for all aspects of his designs,
including the implementation of all Statutory Safety, Health and Environmental Regulations of
South Africa AND the particular requirements, specifications, and regulations of the Employer
pertaining to Health and Safety, Environment, Quality and Engineering.
viii. The Contractor shall be wholly accountable and responsible for the implementation of the
aspects of his designs including commissioning, putting into service and handover of his
constructed designs to the Employer, and his duly appointed ECSA registered Engineers shall
be held accountable and responsible for these aspects of the Works for the lifetime duration of
the Works.
ix. Unless expressly stated to form part of the design responsibility of the Employer and whether
or not specifically stated to form part of the design responsibility of the Contractor under this
section, all residual design responsibility and overall responsibility for the total design solution
for the Works rests with the Contractor.
2.2.4 Geotechnical
The Contractor shall take cognizance of the prevailing soil conditions on Site, geotechnical
investigations undertaken and associated recommendations as referenced under Part C.4: Site
Information.
2.2.5 Procedure for Proposal of Alternative Designs by the Contractor

2.2.5.1 Should the Contractor wish to propose alternative designs, these will only be considered if they are
compliant with the Employer’s requirements and they offer material benefits in terms of time or cost
or quality to the works, provided that the original designs and Works Information as billed in this
document have been priced.
2.2.5.2 Full details of such proposals shall be provided including specification, quantities, costs, method
statement and programme sufficient to support such motivation. Full details of the designers
including their qualifications, experience and professional indemnity insurance shall also be
supplied. Any alternative design is to comply with the Employer’s requirements and must be fit for
purpose.
2.2.5.3 The specifying of minimum design criteria and parameters shall not be considered to invalidate the
Contractor’s obligation to provide detailed competent designs. The Contractor must therefore,
ensure that his alternative design proposals are to his satisfaction in all respects and he may apply
more conservative design criteria or parameters where he considers these to be necessary to
achieve satisfactory standards and comply with the requirements.
2.2.5.4 Should it appear later, during construction, or during the maintenance period, that the design does
not conform to the specified requirements, this shall be treated as a defect.
2.2.6 Procedure for Submission and Acceptance of Contractor’s Design
In submitting the designs as described above, the Contractor shall follow the procedures as detailed
below, unless specifically instructed otherwise in the technical specifications or other documents as
applicable:

FOR BERTH B100
2.2.6.1 In undertaking the Works (including all incidental services required), the Contractor shall conform
and adhere to the requirements of the Contractor Document Submittal Requirements Standard
included in Annexures B (Refer DOC-STD 0001).
2.2.6.2 The Contractor’s documentation shall be issued to the Project Manager under cover of the
Contractor’s transmittal note, indicating all contract references (i.e. Project No, Contract No, etc.)
as well as the Contractor’s project document number, revision number, title and chronological
listing of transmitted documentation.
2.2.6.3 The formats for the Contractor’s data as submitted will be dependent on the project procedure and
will be specified by the Project Manager, upon the notified request of the Contractor.
2.2.6.4 The Contractor shall deliver both hard copies and electronic media copies (CD Rom) to the Project
Manager at the address stated within the Contract Data.
2.2.6.5 All electronic documentation shall be submitted by the Contractor in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) and
native file format, with drawings in ‘rvt’, ‘dgn’, ‘dxf’, ‘dwg’ or similar approved formats as requested
by the Employer.
2.2.6.6 The Contractor shall also provide any design package software files to the Employer, in the format
specified by the Employer, if so requested, in order to review and/or verify drawings and designs.
2.2.6.7 Acceptance of documentation by the Project Manager will in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness of information or conformance with his obligation to provide the
works. This obligation vests solely with the Contractor.
2.2.6.8 After review by the Employer, a copy of the original reviewed/marked-up drawing/document, with
the Project Manager’s consolidated comments and document status marked on the Contractor
review label, will be scanned and the hard copy will be returned to the Contractor under cover of
the project’s transmittal note for revision or re-submittal as instructed.
2.2.6.9 The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager two weeks to review and respond to the
Contractor’s submission of his documentation, i.e. from time of receipt by the Employer to the time
of despatch to the Contractor.
2.2.6.10 On receipt of the reviewed documentation, the Contractor shall make any modifications as
requested or marked up and resubmit the revised documentation to the Project Manager within two
weeks. Queries regarding comments or changes shall be addressed with the Project Manager prior
to re-submittal.
2.2.6.11 Any re-submittals, which do not include the changes or comments as indicated by the Employer,
will be returned to the Contractor to be corrected. The Contractor shall re-issue the revised
documentation incorporating all comments and other specified details not included in the previous
issue within two working days of receipt of the marked-up document.
2.2.6.12 The Contractor is required to undertake design safety reviews with the Project Manager, the NEC
Supervisor, the Employer’s Engineer’s and Professional team, the Employer’s Health and Safety
Officers, the Employer’s Environmental Officers, the Employer’s Quality Assurance and Quality
Control Officers and any other Specialists and/or Subject Matter Experts (SME) as deemed by the
Employer necessary for the provision of the Works.
2.2.6.13 The Contractor shall issues method statements in advance of carrying out items of Works. The
Contractor allows the period for reply for acceptance of method statements. Works does not
commence until the Supervisor has accepted the relevant method statement. The Contractor does
the works in accordance with the accepted method statement.
2.3 Use of Contractor’s Design

2.3.1 The Contractor grants the Employer a licence to use the copyright in all design data presented to
the Employer in relation to the works for any purpose in connection with the construction, re-
construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance and extension of the works, with such licence
being capable of transfer to any third party without the consent of the Contractor.

FOR BERTH B100
2.3.2 The Contractor vests in the Employer full title to the intellectual property and copyright in the
design data created in relation to the works, irrespective of where or what those works may be.
2.3.3 The Contractor grants the Employer a non-exclusive license, in accordance with the provisions
of Section 22 of the Copyright Act 1978, to copy any document/calculation compiled/done by the
Contractor in connection with the Works, to make free and unrestricted use thereof for his own
purposes, modify some or having it modified by a third party for any reasons, to provide copies
thereof to a third party (Contractors or Consultants) of the Employer to be used by them for the
purposes of tendering or consultancy.
2.3.4 Furthermore, if any such document/calculation by any principal Contractor or Subcontractor is
used for the Works, the Contractor requests such principal Contractor or Subcontractor to grant
to the Employer a similar non-exclusive license for the purposes set out herein. The provisions of
this clause do not apply to documents made in connection with the manufacturing process of
Plant but only to the Plant itself.
2.4 Record Drawings, Operating Manuals and Maintenance Schedules

2.4.1 The Contractor shall provide, on a monthly basis, throughout the duration of the contract, redline
marked-up drawings, including all changes to the drawings for the entire Site, with accurate
information pertaining to all constructed installations and infrastructure, irrespective of whether
the equipment and infrastructure is underground or above ground, to the Project Manager.
i. The Contractor prepares two (2) marked up hard copies of the latest revision of the
Employer documents/drawings to represent the As-Built/Final status.
ii. The mark-ups shall be in RED pencil or pen and be complete and accurate. The
Contractor submits to the Project Manager under cover of a Contractor’s Transmittal Note.
2.4.2 The Contractor provides manuals in an A4 hard covered, red, grease and waterproof binder,
using 2 ring type binders. The manuals are well indexed and user friendly and include a
summarized Table of Contents.
2.4.3 Drawings and charts larger than A4 are folded and those greater than A3 are enclosed in an A4
plastic pocket of adequate strength.
2.4.4 The Contractor submits the draft Table of Contents to the Project Manager for acceptance prior
to the compilation and official submittal of the manuals.
2.4.5 The originals of all brochures shall be issued to the Project Manager. When a general brochure
is applicable to a range of equipment, then the specific item, catalogue number or model number
shall be stated, which is best achieved by introducing a separate index page, which cross-
references the specific item to a tag number.
2.4.6 The address, phone numbers, fax numbers and reference numbers of all Sub-Contractors is
provided
2.4.7 Where manuals include drawings that still need to be revised to “As-Built” status, and such
manuals are required prior to ‘As-Built’ status, the manual will not be considered to be in its final
form until the “As-Built” version of each such drawing has been incorporated. The required
number of copies of the manual (s) shall be as specified by the Project Manager and submitted
per type or model number of equipment included in the contract, or as specified by the Project
Manager. A typical example of what the binder/file (s) shall be marked with on the spine and the
front cover is as follows:
i. Project No./Name
ii. Manual Title, e.g. Installation, Maintenance and Operating Manual
iii. Manual Numbering (e.g. Volume 1 of 2, etc.)
iv. Contract Number
v. Contractor Name
2.4.8 Unless otherwise stated, the required number of copies of all As-Built/Final/Data Packs shall be:

FOR BERTH B100
i. 3 x hard copies (Full size)

ii. 4 x CD s (Read Only Format) with Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) and “Native” formats
2.4.9 As-Built/Final Documentation

In undertaking the ‘Works’ (including all incidental services required), the Contractor shall conform
and adhere to the requirements of the ‘Contractor Document Submittal Requirements’ Standard
included in Annexure B (Refer DOC-STD-0001)
2.4.10 Installation, Maintenance and Operating Manuals and Data Books

In undertaking the ’Works’ (including all incidental services required), the Contractor shall conform
and adhere to the requirements of the ‘Data Books and Manuals’ Standard included in Annexure
B (Refer DOC-STD-0001) and the ‘Contractor Documentation Submittal Requirements’ Standard
included in Annexure B (Refer to DOC-STD-0001).

FOR BERTH B100
3 CONSTRUCTION
3.1 Particular Construction Constraints
3.1.1 Risks
The Contractor will be required to provide method statements, risk assessments, job safety analyses and
the like, which shall specifically include measures to mitigate risks at identified high-risk locations.
Particular risks that have already been identified at such locations are outlined below.
i. Camps and Laydown Areas
a. Shipment, loading and off-loading.
b. Rigging plans for installation of heavy goods.
ii. Earthworks
a. Dealing with dust and water.
iii. Relocation and Protection of Services and Infrastructure
a. It is not foreseen that any existing services and/or infrastructure have to be relocated, however
if required, Risk assessments, method statements and procedures must be compiled and
approved by the Employer for these works, including in particular the tie-in of the existing and
relocated sections of these services.
b. Measures for the protection of any existing or new services and/or infrastructure shall also be
documented. Risk assessments, method statements and procedures shall be approved by the
Employer prior to commencement of works near such services and/or infrastructure.
The above lists do not constitute a comprehensive schedule of such risks but are intended only as an
initial guideline to the Contractor.
3.1.2 Sequences and Limitations for Construction or Installation Works

The Contractor shall be responsible for his own construction programme, which shall be subject to
acceptance by the Project Manager.
The following construction methodology shall be followed by the contractor. No deviations from this
methodology shall be permitted. Each of the steps below shall be verified and accepted by the Supervisor
I. The foam monitor towers will require casting of 10 m high concrete columns around the steel
foam riser pipe. The foam pipe shall be internally lined and Contractor ensures that no damage
is possible to the flange faces, inside lining or outside coating of the pipe. Blank flanges shall be
bolted to the ends at all time with allowance for venting to allow for temperature changes.
II. The steel fire water piping will be lined and coated to provide corrosion protection to the steel.
To assist with the lining and coating process, the pipes will have flanged joints at not more than
12 m centres and spools with bends or tees will be limited in size to ensure the spool piece can
be rotated by hand to accommodate the lining process. The Contractor coordinates this with his
lining sub-contractor to ensure all pipe-work can be lined.
III. The following methodology must be followed in order to avoid having to make alterations to pipe
spools that have been fabricated, tested and lined. Any deviation from the methodology below
is at the Contractor’s risk.
a) Contractor performs accurate surveys on all civil works as and when complete including the
pump house, pipe trenches, pipe bridges and pipe supports
b) Contractor checks the surveyed levels and positions of the civil works against the piping
drawings and make amendments to dimensions as required. No alteration of pipe routes
shall be permitted. Change in dimension of more than 100 mm on any straight length or
change in route shall be reported to the Employer who shall amend the piping design.
c) Spool pieces shall be tack welded to the flanges and at all welded joints

FOR BERTH B100
d) The tack welded spool pieces are bolted together or to the equipment that they connect to, to
check for fit and alignment.
e) If required, alterations are made to the spool piece to ensure correct fit and alignment taking
into account allowances for warping or distortions that occur during the fabrication process
f) Once all spool pieces have been checked for fit they can be fully welded and the welds can
be tested.
g) The spool pieces will then be hydro tested
h) Those spool pieces that have passed the fabrication QA tests can be lined and coated
i) The above fabrication and corrosion protection process can be done off site in controlled
conditions to ensure fabrication and corrosion protection to the highest standards.
IV. The fire pump will be installed in a caisson that will be supplied with the fire pump. The caisson
will be installed through an opening in the floor of the pump house and will then need to be
secured in position by fixing it below water level to the quay wall. This will require specialized
marine divers. Once the caisson has been secured to the quay wall the pump will be installed
inside the caisson. The pump shall be supplied in sections and bolted together as the sections
are inserted into the caisson and dropped down below water level.
V. A screen net will also need to be installed around the pump. The net will be fixed around the
pump caisson and will need to be fixed to the quay wall. Specialist marine divers will need to do
this installation.
VI. Once construction is complete the testing and commissioning of the mechanical equipment will
be done. This will consist of hydro testing of the entire system in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA, including running the fire water pump and allowing pumped water to exit
out of the foam monitors and hydrants that form part of the fire system. Thereafter the foam
pump and foam system will be commissioned and the system checked to ensure a good quality
aspirated foam is produced when using the monitors.
VII. Once the mechanical hydrocarbon commissioning has been completed the electrical and
instrumentation commissioning can be done to ensure that all detectors and system controls are
working as intended.
3.2 Employer’s Requirements
3.2.1 Employer’s Site Entry and Security Control, Permits, and Site Regulations
i. The Contractor complies with the requirements of the Employer with regard to Site entry.
The Employer provides magnetically coded ID cards to all employees of the Contractor for Site
access. No charge is to be made for initial issues, but lost or damaged cards must be paid for
ii. The Port of Ngqura is a designated Security Area under the ISPS requirement, and in terms of
this, all access into the Port will be strictly controlled. The cost of complying with this access
security, including labour transport and access requirements, obtaining and maintaining access
cards for the people working on the Site are included in the tendered Price.
iii. Access to the area where the Contractor is working is to be strictly controlled and will be restricted
to construction traffic only. No access will be given to private vehicles or public transport and, in
this regard, the Contractor is to make provisions for bussing his labourers in from an external
meeting / collection point.
iv. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary entry permits for all staff working within the Port of
Ngqura in accordance with the access control requirements of the Port. The Contractor is also
required to obtain the relevant permits for his Subcontractors and all Suppliers. The Contractor is
required to make applications for these permits on behalf of his workers, Suppliers and
Subcontractors and is to nominate a single person to liaise with the relevant Port authorities. The
Contractor is to make a cost and time allowance for obtaining the necessary permits.
v. The Contractor is to be in constant consultation with the Port’s security operations to ensure
compliance with all the required security procedures.
3.2.2 Access and Permits within Port Boundary and TNPA Property

FOR BERTH B100
Sections of the new installations are located within the port area, which is owned and operated by TNPA.
The following, but not limited to, permits and access requirements shall apply to works done within the
abovementioned areas:
i. Medicals: Each of the Contractor’s employees shall undergo a medical examination, certifying that
the employee is fit and capable of undertaking the assigned tasks, as applicable.
ii. Inductions: Each of the Contractor’s employees shall undergo an induction, which will be provided
by the TNPA and TCP SHEQ departments. The Contractor shall provide at least 48 hours prior
notice of when such inductions are required. Each employee shall also, as part of the inductions,
be required to present the medical report as outlined above.
iii. Police clearance: Each of the Contractor’s employees shall have a valid police clearance
certificate.
iv. The Contractor shall arrange, with the PSSM, for the necessary permits in order to access the
Site or any part thereof, as follows:
a. A TNPA Port Access Permit will be required in order to enter the Port of Ngqura.
b. All Contractor’s personnel accessing the Site / Working Areas or part thereof are to undergo
two inductions, a construction induction and an Employer’s induction, prior to being
allowed access.
c. The following procedure applies with respect to the Contractor obtaining permits for his
personnel and/or vehicles accessing the Site and/or the Port of Ngqura.
v. Employer Induction - Mandatory Port Inductions
a. A list of inductees is to be emailed/faxed to Project Manager’s Site Safety Officer.
b. Training co-ordinator will revert back with a date and venue for induction.
c. Once induction is completed, a copy of the induction register as well as car registration
details of all inductees requiring vehicle access permits to be faxed or emailed to the
security Supervisor of the Port of Ngqura.
vi. Construction Inductions
a. Upon completion of the Employer inductions, as outlined above, all Contractor’s personnel
shall undergo a construction induction.
b. No inductions will be given without a valid medical certificate for each person attending the
induction.
c. Induction to be arranged with PSSM prior to arrival on Site
vii. Vehicle permits: The Contractor shall submit a list of all vehicles entering and leaving the port
area, for issuing of vehicle permits. The list shall include the type, model and registration number
of the vehicle, as well as the name of the designated driver.
viii. Tool lists: All tools brought into the port area shall be declared at the TNPA main security entrance.
Tools are to be assigned to a designated vehicle, for further control during entrance and departure
from the port area.
ix. Contractor’s Materials, Plant and Equipment: All Contractor’s Materials, Plant and Equipment
brought into the port area shall be declared at the main security entrance. The documentation for
such Materials, Plant and Equipment shall be presented to the TNPA security persons respectively
whenever these are removed again.
x. Employee’s Equipment: Should the Contractor ever be required to take any of the Employee’s
Equipment out of the port boundaries, such Equipment shall be identified and declared in
accordance with the TNPA gate pass procedures.
xi. Safety files: Prior to commencement of any works within the port area, the Contractor will be
required to submit his safety file to the Employer, TNPA SHEQ departments for review and
approval. Provided that these files meet all requirements, an allowance of two weeks must be
made for the approval of such files.
xii. PPE: The minimum PPE requirements for any of the Contractor’s employees within the port
boundaries shall include hard hats, safety vests and safety boots. Where special circumstances
dictate this, or as per the Contractors activity based risk assessment, or where so advised by the

FOR BERTH B100
Employer, and/or TNPA, the Contractor shall also provide his employees with, but not limited to,
ear protection, eye protection, dust masks, safety harnesses and life jackets.
Regular meetings shall be held between the Contractor’s Site manager, the Project Manager and
the designated TNPA representatives to discuss and arrange access for the execution of works
within the port boundaries. Preference shall at all times be given to port operations, which may
not be disrupted.
3.2.3 Restrictions to Access on Site, Roads, Walkways and Barricades

Apart from gaining entry or exit to the site, the Contractor ensures that staff members do not move about
in areas where they are not permitted to be. Staff members shall refrain from entering buildings occupied
by the Employer, unless required for specific work purposes.
The Contractor provides special inductions to all personnel that are required to execute works close to
live installations, including but not limited to overhead power lines, conveyors and associated operational
plant. Movement of personnel close to such live installations shall also be restricted to the execution of
activities essential to the execution of works in these areas.
The Contractor provides transport for all staff members between the construction Site and Contractor
yard, as well as transport to and from work.
3.2.4 People Restrictions on Site, Hours of Work, Conduct and Records

i. The working hours shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Department of Labour and
the Industrial Relations Policy included in Annexure F of the Works Information. This information
relating to working hours shall be supplied to the Project Manager, prior to commencement of the
proposed working hours. Normal working hours shall be Monday to Friday 07h00 – 17h00. If the
Contractor requires working extended hours, a formal request shall be submitted to the Supervisor
for approval. People do not remain on the Site overnight without the agreement of the Project
Manager.
ii. The Contractor keeps daily records of his people, Plant and equipment engaged on the Site and
Working Areas (including Sub-Contractors) with access to such daily records available for
inspection by the Project Manager and/or the PIRM at all reasonable times.(summarised activity
and progress for the day must be mentioned). The Contractor shall maintain and submit daily Site
diaries to the Supervisor each day.
iii. All people working within the Port of Ngqura are to undergo an induction on the port health and
safety, security and general procedures. All drivers of vehicles using the port operational roads
shall undergo an induction course to familiarise them with the terminal layout and the applicable
regulations.
iv. The Contactor undertakes the works such that the Port’s leading lights are not obstructed or
obscured, either by construction plant or lights.
v. All Contractor’s staff and labour engaged in the provision of the Works shall comply with TCP and
TNPA safety requirements and are equipped with all necessary PPE, high visibility apparel and,
when working within two meters of the quay wall, floating apparel.
3.2.5 Title to Materials from demolition and excavation

As per the Employer’s standard regulations, the Contractor has no title to materials from any excavation
or demolition. Where such materials become available for spoiling, the Project Manager instructs the
Contractor how to label, mark, set-aside or dispose of such materials for the benefit of the Employer, in
accordance with ECC Clause 73.1.

FOR BERTH B100
3.2.6 Co-operating with and obtaining acceptance of Others

Ongoing coordination and cooperation is required between the Contractor, Employer, Project Manager,
Others appointed by the Employer and project stakeholders in order mitigate risks of delays in
construction.
The Contractor co-operates with:
i. all officials and employees of the Employer and all parties acting on behalf of the Employer
ii. Other effected/associated 3rd parties.
iii. Any local and/or national authorities, including but not limited to traffic officials, the Nelson
Mandela Bay and officials of the CDC
iv. Others appointed by the Employer to supply, install and construct:
a. Bulk electrical supply and substation
b. High mast lighting
c. Earthing and lightening protection
d. Buildings
e. Bulk liquids handling facilities
f. Berth access roads
g. Data and Telecommunications
h. CCTV and Access control
i. Perimeter Security fence
Others working on the same location with whom coordination is require include those responsible for:
a. Construction of buildings
b. Installation of the marine load arms and product pipelines
c. Construction of new access roads on the berth
d. Construction of new high mast lighting on the berth
e. Installation of bulk electrical supply to the berth
3.2.7 Publicity and progress photographs
The Contractor shall under no circumstances share with any 3rd party or publish any photographs, without
the explicit written approval of the Employer.
The Contractor shall also refrain from making any statements or engaging with the media on any matter
relating to this project, without the express written consent of the Employer.
3.2.8 Notice Board
The Contractor displays a notice board at the Contractor’s site offices stating company name, contact
details and description of Works.
3.2.9 Site Records
The Contractor shall keep daily records of all construction activities, including records of manpower and
equipment on Site. Copies of these records shall be forwarded to the Project Manager on a daily basis.
Regular progress reports shall also be submitted to the Employer and Project Manager, as detailed under
Section 7.6 of the Works Information. Progress report include photographs of Plant and Material and
completed permanent Works.
3.2.10 Site services and facilities
The position of the existing supply connection points for electricity and water is to be indicated by the
Project Manager to the Contractor. The Contractor is to make his own arrangements for the connection

FOR BERTH B100
of such services to his Working Areas for his use during construction. Where such services are purchased
from the Port, the applicable tariffs are those that the Local Authority charges the Port and to be
determined by the Contractor. There is no water-borne sewage facility available.
The cost of meters, connections and all other usage costs associated with the provision of services are
to the Contractor’s account.
3.3 Facilities provided by the Contractor

3.3.1 Access
The Site and access to the Site will be made available to the Contractor for the duration of the works,
subject to the limitations provided in this Works Information. Access routes are as indicated in Part C4 –
Site Information.
3.3.2 Yard and Laydown Areas
The Contractor provides temporary offices, potable water, kitchen and rest facilities, ablutions, stores and
workshops as well as stores and preserves Plant and Material, Equipment as may be required for the
works. Contractor uses only the space allocated by the Employer for this purpose.
The site establishment area shall be clearly sign posted and be compliant with the relevant safety
regulations and restrictions that might be in place until the Contractor has de-established from site and
comply with OHS Act 85 of 1993.
The Contractor ensures that the areas are properly fenced and secured at all times and provides all
access control.
Accommodation of the Contractor’s staff at the yard and laydown areas will not be permitted. The
Contractor may retain 24-hour security at the yard and laydown areas provided that proper temporary
sanitation and shelters are provided.
The yard and laydown areas and any other areas disturbed during construction shall be rehabilitated to
its original state prior to site handover to the Employer.
3.3.3 Offices for Project Manager’s Representative

The Contractor shall supply, install, connect and maintain 1 No. 6m x 3m site office for sole use of the
Supervisor, Safety Officer, Environmental Officer and one visitor space (for the project team). Each office
shall be complete with a 9500BTU air conditioning unit, burglar bars, 4 No. desk, 4 No. office chairs, and
a steel filing cabinet. Daily office cleaning will be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall move
the office if and when necessary as the Site boundaries change. The Contractor shall remove the office
from Site after Completion of the whole of the works.
The Contractor shall supply, install, connect and maintain a fully serviced (daily) 1 No. 6m x 3m portable
kitchen for use of the Supervisor and his team. The kitchen shall be complete with a 9500BTU air
conditioning unit, burglar bars, cupboard, table, chair, fridge (minimum 600l gross volume), microwave
(800 watt), sandwich presser with grilling option, kettle, 10 no cups and cutlery (set with 12 No.),tea
(rooibos and five roses), coffee (Nescafe), sugar, milk and filtered water provided for 8 pax. The
Contractor shall move the office if and when necessary as the Site boundaries change. The Contractor
shall remove the office from Site after Completion of the whole of the works.
I. 1No. A3 Scanner, printer, copier combination (Colour)
II. Stationery with paper as required
3.3.4 Temporary lighting and fencing

The Contractor provides temporary lighting and fencing around every section occupied by them during
the construction period. Such fencing demarcates and secures the construction area at each stage and
is erected before work starts in that area and removed only upon Completion of that area and re-erected

FOR BERTH B100
as work proceeds. The Contractor includes for all costs such as lighting and fencing, including access
control into and out of these restricted areas.
3.3.5 Existing Premises, Inspection of Adjoining Private and Public Properties

The Contractor takes cognisance of and inspects the existing infrastructure adjoining and/or adjacent to
the Site, which includes:
v. Existing power and communications cables.
vi. Existing wet services and pipelines.
vii. TNPA security gates
viii. The entire B100 Berth structure
3.4 Survey Control and Setting out of the Works

The Contractor shall appoint such a competent surveyor to properly set out all works prior to installation,
as well as after installation for as-build documentation purposes. Should the Project Manager be
unsatisfied with the setting out or any other associated survey details, he may request that an additional
surveyor be appointed to validate all coordinates.
3.5 Underground Services and Infrastructure

No excavations shall be done within and outside the port area, as applicable, in the absence of a written
permit, to be issued by the port authorities and other relevant parties. The Contractor shall also ensure
that any other required permits to excavate are in place.
The Contractor shall make every effort to obtain all relevant drawings, indicating the position of potential
existing and new services, via the Employer. At any location where construction activities will occur,
including in particular excavations and earthworks, the Contractor shall also undertake surveys via
ground-penetrating radar systems and electrical cable locators, as an added measure, to determine the
presence of existing and/or new underground services and infrastructure.
In addition to the above where any live, existing or new services are anticipated, the Contractor shall
excavate by hand trial pits and proving trenches. Prior to commencing with such hand excavations, the
Contractor shall provide detailed and specific method statements, risk assessments and the like for
approval by the Employer.
Care shall be taken by the Contractor to protect all existing services, unless they are confirmed to be
abandoned or will be replaced as part of this project. The same care shall apply to any new services.
If any existing and/or new service is damaged, that should have been located or protected by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall be required to carry the cost of the repair of that service.
Should any service be damaged by the Contractor, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to report such
damage to the Project Manager immediately.
Where the Contractor encounters underground services or existing service cables or service ducts, the
Contractor shall undertake the following:
i. Immediately notify the Project Manager of the located service.

ii. Immediately notify the relevant utility owners or officials.
iii. Ascertain whether the service is still required and must remain live, or whether the service has
been abandoned.
iv. If the service is confirmed as abandoned, the Contractor shall remove such service, if so
instructed by the Employer.

FOR BERTH B100
v. If the service is deemed live, it shall be protected by the Contractor and marked on the specific
record drawing(s) for that area or service discipline. The service shall be demarcated by
placement of brightly painted wooden stakes to provide clear visibility of such services to the
construction teams and Others working in the area.
This requirement shall be included in the method statements, risk assessments and the like, to be
submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Employer.
3.6 Giving Notice of Works to be Covered Up

3.6.1 The Contractor notifies the Supervisor in writing of any elements of the Works which are to be
covered up. This notification is given not less than 48 (forty eight) hours prior to the proposed
covering up.
i. All buried pipelines, services and ducts, where relevant, including pressure testing of pipelines.
3.6.2 The Contractor shall not cover the Works without the authorization of the Supervisor.
3.6.3 The Contractor shall make the Project Manager and Supervisor aware of any tests and
inspections required by the Employers Quality Management Procedures and/or the Employers
Engineers.
3.7 Hook-Up to Existing Works
Reference shall be made to the specifications and drawings as referenced under Annexures A.
3.8 Temporary Works and Site Services

3.8.1 Excavations and associated Water Control
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all excavations are rendered safe and suitable for
construction and conform to the requirements of the Construction Regulations (CR 13). The Contractor
shall not continue construction in conditions that the Project Manager does not approve of. The Contractor
will be required to design and submit for approval the methods of excavation.
The control of water during construction, including in particular dewatering of deep excavations, shall be
managed and controlled in accordance with method statements to be compiled by the Contractor and
approved by the Project Manager prior to the commencement of the works. These method statements
shall include all measures that are required to remove or mitigate adverse environmental impacts. The
Contractor will only be allowed to construct such drainage water control systems once the method
statement is approved by the Project Manager.
3.8.2 Control of Noise, Dust and Waste

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to contain unacceptable levels of noise and dust, in
accordance with the specified and referenced environmental, health and safety requirements.
The control of water during construction, including in particular drainage of deep excavations, shall be
managed and controlled in accordance with method statements to be compiled by the Contractor and
approved by the Project Manager prior to the commencement of the works. These method statements
shall include all measures that are required to remove or mitigate adverse environmental impacts.
The Contractor shall dispose of all waste products at an appropriately licensed and registered waste
disposal site, to be approved by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide written proof that all
permits for the waste disposal site are in place.
3.9 Completion, Testing, Commissioning and Correction of Defects

FOR BERTH B100
3.9.1 Work to be done by the Completion Date

At the completion date, the Contractor shall have done everything as described under this works
information
3.9.2 Works to be done after Completion

Contractor is permitted to remove temporary facilities from site after completion.
3.9.3 Use of the Works before Completion has been Certified

The Employer uses the fire pumps and water main once these have been tested and commissioned
notwithstanding that the foam system might not have been fully commissioned at that time
3.9.4 Materials Facilities and Samples for Tests and Inspections

Contractor provides all necessary consumables for commissioning and testing including:
i. Diesel, engine coolant, engine oil, gear box lubricant and other consumable required for the fire
pump engine to function,
ii. Foam concentrate
iii. Foam pump lubricant
Once testing has been completed, Contractor refills all the above consumables.
Contractor provides access to the Supervisor to inspect and test the Works
3.9.5 Commissioning
Commissioning of each system is done according to the following high level procedure also as per the
commissioning template as reference under Annexure A:
iv. All Work is inspected by the Contractor to ensure all defects are identified and rectified. Contractor
informs Employer of all defects identified and the remedial action taken.
v. Once the defects identified by the Contractor have been rectified, the Contractor and the
Supervisor shall jointly inspect the Works. Any further defects shall be recorded and categorised
according to the following
a. Defects that are urgent and required immediate attention to enable testing and
commissioning to be completed
b. Defects that can be rectified after commissioning
c. Items that are out of scope and require approval to be implemented
vi. The Contractor and the Supervisor shall jointly inspect once all identified defects have been
rectified.
vii. The Project Manager notifies the Contractor that commissioning may proceed.
viii. A Safety review is held with the Contractor, Supervisor, Project Manager and necessary experts
for the system being commissioned.
ix. Each system and item of major equipment is thoroughly checked using an accepted pre-
commissioning check list.
x. Functionality is checked for all items under no load conditions.
xi. Once all checks are complete and functionality confirmed, the system is started under test
conditions and then put into operation.
xii. Contractor rectifies all further defects identified during the commissioning process and previously
identified defects including approved compensation events.
xiii. The Contractor and the Supervisor shall jointly inspect once all identified defects have been
rectified.
The Contractor provides the following commissioning activities to bring the Works in use in conjunction
with the Employer:
i. Pre-commissioning tests and checking of the fire pump installation
ii. Pre-commissioning tests and checking of the diesel engine and fuel supply
iii. Site acceptance test of the fire pumps supervised by the pump manufacturer

FOR BERTH B100
iv. Setting up control valves and other items for the system to function in accordance with the
Employer’s design
The Contractor provides a commissioning report in the format provided by the Employer.
3.9.6 Take over procedures
Contractor notifies the Project Manager when commissioning is complete and the works are in
operation.
The Project Manager certifies completion of the works.

3.9.7 Performance tests after completion
The Contractor performs the following performance tests after Completion of the works:
i. Fire pump performance tests at zero flow, rated flow and 150% of flow as required by NFPA 20
and NFPA 25.
ii. Flow and pressure tests at hydrants furthest away from the pump station to verify these comply
with SANS 10089-1 requirements.
iii. Performance test of the fixed monitors using water to check the functionality of the remote
controls and the trajectory achieved. The test shall be conducted in windless or low wind speed
conditions and performance, adjusted for wind speed, checked against the Employer’s
specification.
iv. Performance test of the fixed monitors using foam to check the functionality of the remote
controls and the trajectory achieved. The test shall be conducted in windless or low wind speed
conditions and performance, adjusted for wind speed, checked against the Employer’s
specification.
v. Remote start of the fire pump using push bottom fire alarm stations located on the berth to
confirm functionality.
vi. Remote start of the fire pump from the control room to confirm functionality.
vii. Activation of hydrocarbon gas detection system to confirm functionality.

3.9.8 Training and technology transfer
The Contractor facilitates the following requirements for training workshops after Completion for the
works in use:
i. Fire pump basic functionality:
a. Pre-start checklist
b. Local manual start and stop at the engine
c. Remote start from the pump house panel
d. Remote start using fire alarm push buttons
e. Remote start from the control room
ii. Fire pump routine tests
a. Starting the pump
b. Test at no flow conditions
c. Annual full performance test at all flow conditions (0%, 100% and 150%)
iii. Foam system

FOR BERTH B100
a. Foam delivery using the foam pump

b. Foam circulation
c. Foam sampling and testing
iv. Fixed monitors
a. Inspection checks required
3.9.9 Access given by the Employer for correction of Defects

The Contractor complies with the following constraints and procedures of the Employer where the
Project Manager arranges access for the Contractor after Completion:
Access into areas already handed over by the Contractor for correction of any defect shall be subject
to the approval of Port’s Operations, and these times shall be communicated to the Contractor by the
Project Manager.
The areas required by the Contractor will need to be temporarily barricaded by the Contractor before
the Contractor commences with any corrective work.

FOR BERTH B100
4 PLANT AND MATERIALS STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP

4.1 Plant and Materials
4.1.1 The Contractor provides Plant and Materials for inclusion in the Works in accordance with the
Standard Specifications and/or Project Specifications, unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the
Works Information provided by the Employer. All Plant and Materials are new, unless the use of
old or refurbished goods and/or Materials are expressly permitted as stated elsewhere in this
Works Information or as may be subsequently instructed by the Project Manager.
4.1.2 The Contractor replaces any Plant and Materials subject to breakages (whether in the Working
Areas or not) or any Plant and Materials not conforming to standards or specifications stated and
notifies the Project Manager and the Supervisor on each occasion where replacement is required.
4.1.3 No Plant or Materials will be provided “free issue” by the Employer
4.1.4 The Contractor provides all Plant and Materials necessary for the Works.
4.1.5 The Contractor supplies all certification including test certificates, user manuals, maintenance
manuals and data books with respect to Plant and Materials procured for the Works.
4.2 Investigation, Survey and Site Clearance

The Contractor will be responsible for setting out the Works.
The Contractor validates the information provided by the Project Manager and records all existing and
final levels on a survey drawing and presents this to the Project Manager for acceptance.
The Contractor shall carry out the following investigations at the Site:
i. Additional topographical surveys where deemed necessary by the Contractor, by the Employer
or by the Project Manager.
4.3 Interpretation of standardised specifications, Project specifications and
national standards
4.3.1 General interpretations
Where the word or expression “Employer” is used, read “Employer”;
Where the word or expression “Contractor” is used, read “Contractor”;
Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Project Manager” or “Supervisor” as the
context requires;
Where the word or expression “schedule of quantities” is used, this is deleted in entirety. Assessment
and payment is in accordance with the conditions of contract (and the ECC main and secondary
options stated therein);
4.4 Building works

4.4.1 Where the Association of South African Quantity Surveyors Model Preamble for Trades 1999 are
used within the Works Information, the following interpretations and meanings shall apply:
4.4.2 In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between any Model Preamble
for Trades 1999 (whether standard or written as a particular project specification) contained in
the Works Information and the conditions of contract, the conditions of contract take precedence
within the ECC Contract.
4.4.3 In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between any Model Preamble
for Trades 1999 (whether standard or written as a particular project specification) contained in
this paragraph 4.2 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information and specific statements contained

FOR BERTH B100
elsewhere in C3.1 Employer’s Works Information, the specific statements contained elsewhere
shall prevail, without prejudice to the Project Manager’s express duty to resolve any ambiguity or
inconsistency in the Works Information under ECC Clause 17.1.
4.4.4 Within the Model Preambles for Trades 1999, the following amendments and interpretations shall
apply:
Where the word or expression “Principal Agent” is used, read “Project Manager” or
“Supervisor” as the context requires.
Where the word or expression “Contractor” is used, read “Contractor”.
Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Project Manager” or “Supervisor” as
the context requires.
Where the Model Preambles for Trades 1999 mention “rates” for measured work and any
contractual statements relating to payment, all such statements shall be discounted, with the
ECC conditions of contract taking precedence.
4.4.5 Within the Model Preambles for Trades 1999, A. GENERAL, the following amendments and
interpretations shall apply:
Where the word or expression “bills of quantities” is used, this shall be discounted for the
purposes of the Works Information. The ECC Contract Data - Part One states the main option
to apply within the ECC Contract between the Parties.
4.4.6 Within the Model Preambles for Trades 1999, B. ALTERATIONS, B.2 MATERIALS FROM THE
ALTERATIONS, CREDIT, ETC and C. EARTHWORKS, C1.4 Materials from demolitions shall
not apply. C3.1 Employer’s Works Information paragraph 3.1.6 states details of the Contractor’s
title (if any) to Materials arising from excavations and/or demolitions and how such Materials are
either to be disposed of or re-used in the works.
4.4.7 Within the Model Preamble for Trades 1999 Q. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE, Q.24 TESTS shall
be deemed to be included within paragraph 3.2.1 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.4.8 Within the Model Preamble for Trades 1999 U. EXTERNAL WORKS, U.3.8 Process control tests
shall be deemed to be included within paragraph 3.2.1 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.4.9 The principles, meanings and interpretation stated and established within paragraphs 6.2.1 to
6.2.8 with respect to the Model Preambles for Trades 1999 equally apply to the other Model
Preambles for Trades 1999 references [state particulars of Model Preambles used] used within
this paragraph 4.2 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.5 Civil and structural engineering works
4.5.1 Where the SANS 1200 series of Specifications are used within the Works Information, the
following interpretations and meanings shall apply:
4.5.2 In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between any SANS 1200
Specification (whether standard or written as a particular project specification) contained in the
Works Information and the conditions of contract, the conditions of contract take precedence
within the ECC contract.
4.5.3 In case of any conflict in interpretation, ambiguity or discrepancy between any SANS 1200
Specification (whether standard or written as a particular project specification) contained in this
paragraph 4.3 of the Employer’s Works Information and specific statements contained elsewhere
in C3.1 Employer’s Works Information, the specific statements contained elsewhere shall prevail,
without prejudice to the Project Manger’s express duty to resolve any ambiguity or inconsistency
in the Works Information under ECC Clause 17.1.
4.5.4 Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL, the following amendments and interpretations shall apply:
Where the word or expression “Employer” is used, read “Employer”;
Where the word or expression “Contractor” is used, read “Contractor”;
Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Project Manager” or “Supervisor” as
the context requires;

FOR BERTH B100
Where the word or expression “schedule of quantities” is used, this is deleted in entirety.
Assessment and payment is in accordance with the conditions of contract (and the ECC main
and secondary options stated therein);
4.5.5 Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 2.3 DEFINITIONS, the following apply:
“Acceptable. Approved (Approval)” is interpreted as either a Project Manager or a Supervisor
communication or instruction in relation to Works Information compliance, consistent with the
conditions of contract as the context requires;
“Adequate” is deleted. The Project Manager notifies the Contractor where the Contractor has
not complied with the Works Information;
“Measurement and payment” and the further definitions contained within 6.3 c) are deleted.
and secondary options stated therein);
4.5.6 Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 2.6 APPROVAL, the following applies:
“Approval” by either the Project Manager and/or the Supervisor is without prejudice to ECC
Clause 14.1 and, inter alia, ECC Clauses 13.1, 14.3 and 27.1.
4.5.7 SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 2.8 ITEMS IN SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES, is deleted in entirety.
and secondary options stated therein).
4.5.8 SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.2 STRUCTURES AND NATURAL MATERIAL ON SITE, applies only
to the extent that it is consistent with paragraph 3.1.6 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.5.9 Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 7.1 PLANT, the following applies:
Where the word or expression “Plant” is used, read “Equipment”.
4.5.10 SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 7.2 CONTRACTOR’S OFFICES, STORES AND SERVICES, applies
but the Project Manager resolves any inconsistency with statements included within paragraph
3.1.12 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.5.11 SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.1 SURVEY, applies only to the extent that it is consistent with
paragraph 3.1.14 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.5.12 Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.2 WATCHING, BARRICADING, LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC
CROSSINGS, the following applies:
Where the word or expression “specification” is used, read “Works Information”.
4.5.13 SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 3.4 PROTECTION OF OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND
SERVICES applies only to the extent that it is consistent with the specific statements made
elsewhere in C3.1 Employer’s Works Information and in any case and at all times consistent with
the conditions of contract.
4.5.14 Within SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 5 TESTING, the following applies:
Where the word or expression “Engineer” is used, read “Supervisor”.
4.5.15 SANS 1200 A: GENERAL 8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT, is deleted in entirety.
and secondary options stated therein).
4.5.16 The principles, meanings and interpretation stated and established within paragraphs 6.3.1 to
6.3.15 with respect to SANS 1200 series and to SANS 1200 A: GENERAL equally apply to the
other SANS 1200 specification references [state particulars of SANS 1200 used ] used within this
paragraph 6.3 of C3.1 Employer’s Works Information.
4.6 Electrical and mechanical engineering works
4.6.1 Where SANS 10142 and/or SANS 10198 specifications are used within the Works Information,
then where the term “Equipment” (or the like) is used with the meaning of installation and items
left behind in the works, then please read this term as “Plant” for ECC defined term compliance.

FOR BERTH B100
4.7 Fire Engineering Works

4.7.1 Refer to section 5 and Annexure A for all the technical drawings, specification and datasheets
related to the fire engineering works

FOR BERTH B100
5 LIST OF DRAWINGS
5.1 Drawings issued by the Employer
This is the list of drawings issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and which apply to
this contract.
Note: Some drawings and technical specification may contain both Works Information and Site
Information.
This is the list of specifications issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and which apply
to this contract.
Document No. Rev No. Description

1126901-001-SP-0013 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Project Specification portion 1
1126901-001-SP-0001 1 Fire Water Pump Package Specification
1126901-001-SP-0002 1 Pump Caisson Specification
1126901-001-SP-0003 1 Foam Monitor Package Specification
1126901-001-SP-0004 1 Portable Foam Monitor Package Specification
1 Piping Specification for Fabrication, Erection, Testing and
1126901-001-SP-0005
Inspection
1126901-001-SP-0006 1 Piping line class specification for fire-water
1126901-001-SP-0007 1 Piping line class specification for diesel
1126901-001-SP-0008 1 Piping line class specification for foam concentrate
Commissioning is done according to this template:

1126901-PLN-0009 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Commissioning Management Plan
This is the list of drawings issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and which apply to
this contract.
Rev
Drawing No. Description
No.
Process Schematics
1126901-1-B01-M-PI-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Fighting P&ID
1126901-1-B01-M-PF-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Process Flow Diagram
Locality Plan
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0013-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Locality Plan
Mechanical Drawings
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0007-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection General Piping Arrangement
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0009-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Mechanical works at Loading
Facility Layout and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0010-01 Berth B100 Fire Protection Southern Mechanical works
1A
Layout and Details

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0011-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Piping Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0009-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump Caisson Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0010-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Hydrants Type "1" Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0012-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Booster Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0013-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump In Connection Details
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0004-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Hydrant Coverage Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0005-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Monitor Coverage Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0007-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Fighting Equipment Layout
Piping Isometric Drawings
1126901-1-B01-M-IS-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fabrication Isometric for Ø300-
SW-B100-2001-CSL140
SW-B100-2002-CSL140
SW-B100-2003-CSL140
SW-B100-2004-CSL140
SW-B100-2005-CSL140
SW-B100-2006-CSL140
SW-B100-2007-CSL140
SW-B100-2008-CSL140
SW-B100-2009-CSL140
SW-B100-2010-CSL140
1126901-1-B01-M-IS-0011-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fabrication Isometric for 200-
SW-B100-2011-CSL140
SW-B100-2012-CSL140
SW-B100-2013-CSL140
SW-B100-3001-CSL140
FS-B100-3002-CSL140
SW-B100-3003-CSL140

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
FS-B100-3004-CSL140
FC-B100-4001-SS140
FC-B100-4002-SS140
FC-B100-4003-SS140
SW-B100-5001-CSL140
SW-B100-5002-CSL140
D-B100-2015-CS140
D-B100-2016-CS140
D-B100-2017-CS140
D-B100-2019-CS140
D-B100-2020-CS140
D-B100-2021-CS140
Civil and Structural Drawings
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Civil Works Site Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0002-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Elevations
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0002-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Civil Works at Loading Facility
Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0003-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Southern Civil Works Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0008-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Foundation and
Surface bed Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0009-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Tower Layouts and
Elevations
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0014-01 0A B100 Fire Protection Civil Works at South of Loading
Facility Layouts
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0002-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Civil works at Loading Facility
Sections and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0003-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Southern Civil works Sections
and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0004-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Sections and
Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0005-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Spill Slab Sections and Details

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0006-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Pipe Supports
and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0008-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Tower Access Ladder
and Platform
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0016-01 0A B100 Fire Protection Culvert Civil Works Sections and
Details
Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0005-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-01 Monitor controls
hydraulic pump MCC general arrangement
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0006-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-02 Distribution Board
General Arrangement
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0010-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Electrical Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0011-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire pump house electrical
layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0012-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire pump house
instrumentation layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0013-01 1 Berth A100 / B100 Fire Protection Gas Detector Support
1126901-1-B01-M-PL-0001-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Electrical Block Diagram
1126901-1-B01-M-SD-0001-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-01 Monitor controls
hydraulic pump MCC schematic Sheet 1
1126901-1-B01-M-SD-0002-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-02 schematic Sheet 1
1126901-1-B01-M-SD-0003-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Control Interconnection Loop
Drawing
1126901-1-B01-M-SL-0001-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-02 Single Line Diagram
This is the list of engineering schedules and lists issued by the Employer at or before the Contract
Date and which apply to this contract.

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
Document No. Description
No.
1126901-001-EL-0002 0 Berth B100 Fire Protection Mechanical Equipment List
1126901-001-LL-0002 0 Berth B100 Fire Protection Piping Line List
1126901-001-VL-0002 0 Berth B100 Fire Protection Piping Valve List
1126901-001-CS-0002 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Cable Schedule
This is the list of technical data sheets issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and
which apply to this contract.
Rev
Data Sheet No. Description
No.
Mechanical
1126901-000-DS-0031 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Diesel Supply
1126901-000-DS-0032 Tank
1126901-000-DS-0033 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Air Eliminator
1126901-000-DS-0034 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Relief Valve
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Test
1126901-000-DS-0035 Arrangement Flowmeter
1126901-000-DS-0036 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Caisson
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Station Pressure
1126901-000-DS-0037 Regulating Valve
1126901-000-DS-0038 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Station Inline Inductor
1126901-000-DS-0039 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Monitor
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Concentrate Supply
1126901-000-DS-0040 Tank
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Concentrate Circulation
1126901-000-DS-0041 Pump
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam concentrate relief valve
1126901-000-DS-0042 datasheet
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Pressure Sustaining Valve for
1126901-000-DS-0052 Pump Minimum Flow
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Municipal Supply Pressure
1126901-000-DS-0053 Reducing Valve
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Pressure Reducing Valve for
1126901-000-DS-0054 Pump House Sprinklers
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Restriction Orifice for Pump
1126901-000-DS-0055 Minimum Flow
1126901-000-DS-0056 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Municipal Supply Water Meter
Piping
1
1126901-000-DS-0017 Fire water gate valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0018 1 Fire water butterfly valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0019 1 Fire water ball valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0020 1 Fire water non-return valve datasheet

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
1126901-000-DS-0021 1 Fire water backflow preventer datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0022 1 Foam concentrate ball valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0023 1 Foam concentrate non return valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0024 1 Diesel ball valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0025 1 Diesel non return valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0026 1 Foam concentrate hose datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0027 1 Pressure indicator datasheet
Fire Fighting
1126901-000-DS-0013 1 Fire Hose Reel
1126901-000-DS-0014 1 Fire Hydrant
1126901-000-DS-0015 1 Potable Foam Monitor
1126901-000-DS-0016 1 Portable Monitor Foam Concentrate Tanks
1126901-000-DS-0028 1 Foam Concentrate Datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0051 1 Fire Main Booster Connection
Instrumentation
1126901-000-DS-0043 2 Hydrocarbon gas detector
1126901-000-DS-0044 2 Foam concentrate tank level transmitter
1126901-000-DS-0046 2 Pressure transmitter

FOR BERTH B100
6 MANAGEMENT AND START-UP

6.1 Management Meetings
Regular meetings to be convened and chaired by the Project Manager are as follows:
Approximate time &

Title and purpose Location Attendance by:
interval
Employer, Contractor (key

Prior to
persons) and Project
Kick-Off Meeting Commencement of Port of Ngqura
Manager (appropriate
Construction
delegates)
Port of Ngqura Employer, Contractor (key

Contract Progress persons) and Project
Fortnightly
Meeting Manager (appropriate
delegates)
Port of Ngqura Employer, Contractor (key

Technical meeting Fortnightly
delegates)

Risk Workshop Monthly Port of Ngqura
delegates)
Port of Ngqura Project Manager (and

appropriate delegates),
Risk Register and
Supervisor (and
Compensation Weekly
appropriate delegates) and
Events
Contractor (appropriate
key persons)
Port of Ngqura Employer, Project Manager

(and appropriate
delegates), Contractor (line
Monthly SHE
Monthly management, site
meeting
supervisors, safety officer,
environmental officer and
safety reps)
Project Manager (and

Safety Visible Felt
appropriate delegates) and
Leadership Weekly On Site
Contractor (appropriate
Walkabout
key persons)
Contractor’s site
Safety Workshop Bi-weekly On Site
supervisors

Safety Committee persons) and Project
Every second month Port of Ngqura
Meeting Manager (appropriate
delegates)

FOR BERTH B100
Meetings of a specialist nature may be convened as specified elsewhere in this Works Information or,
if not so specified, by persons and at times and locations to suit the parties. Records of these meetings
are to be submitted to the Project Manager by the person convening the meeting within five days of
the meeting.
All meetings are to be recorded using minutes and a register prepared and circulated by the person
who convened the meeting. Such minutes and registers are not to be used for the purpose of
confirming actions or instructions under the contract, as these are to be done separately by the person
identified in the Conditions of Contract to carry out such actions or instructions.
6.2 Documentation Control

The Contractor provides documentation in accordance with the requirements of the Contractor
Documentation Submittal Requirements and the Contractor Documentation Schedule (CDS) and makes
specific reference thereto within his Quality Management System and Quality Procedures.
The Contractor Document Submittal Requirements is contained within Annexure B (Contractor

Documentation Submittal Requirements) of the Works Information.
A standard Contractor Documentation ‘Starter Kit’ will be issued to the Contractor upon award and
consists of the following:
 Standard Project Drawing Sheet;

 Contractor Document Register (DOC-FAT-0002);
 A4 Review Coversheet for Documents (DOC-FAT-0067);
 Document Deliverable Matrix (DOC-FAT-0075).
The Contractor shall assign a dedicated person to provide the services required to execute the
documentation control function.
The nominated individual shall be fully conversant with document control systems and be suitably
qualified with a minimum of 5 years’ experience in Document Management to provide an acceptable
interface with the Employer’s Document Control. The CV of the nominated person shall be submitted
to the Project Manager for approval.
6.3 Safety Risk Management

The Contractor complies with the following HAS specifications and standards:
i. Annexure C: Health and Safety Project Specification 1126901-SP-0001;

ii. Occupational Health and Safety Act (Act 85 of 1993) and Regulations;
iii. Transnet health and safety policies and procedures;
iv. National Road Traffic Act.
The Contractor ensures that its Subcontractors comply with the above mentioned requirements.
The Employer will acknowledge the achievement of specific safety milestones set for the project with
regards to incident statistics, incident recording, safety observation and conversations (SOC’s)
participation, safety initiatives, etc.
The Contractor makes the HAS specification available to its employees and subcontractors in the
language of this contract and other local languages as required.
The Contractor conducts a risk assessment and method statement pack prior to carrying out any activity
on the Site to the approval of the Project Manager.
The lines of communication of the various personnel acting on behalf of the Project Manager, who
communicates directly with the Contractor, and his key persons with respect to the HAS specification,

FOR BERTH B100
are contained within Annexure C (Health and Safety Project Specification 1126901-SP-0001 . One such
person is the Clients appointed PrCHSA who will be responsible for obtaining the project construction
work permit.
The roles and responsibilities of the various personnel acting on behalf of the Project Manager with
respect to the HAS Project specification and health and safety issues as per Annexure C (Health and
Safety Specification 1126901-SP-0001
The Contractor shall appoint a full time CHSO per shift, registered with SACPCMP for the duration of
the works, the number of which depending on the scope, complexity, and high risk activities involved,
as required by the Construction regulations of 2014, regulation 8(5). The Health and Safety Officer(s)
must be on site when work commences at the start of the day and must remain on site until all activities
for that day (including the activities of sub-contractors) have been completed.
The CM is responsible, within the context of the HAS project Specification, for health and safety on the
Site and reports to the Project Manager. The CM specific tasks are detailed in:
 Annexure C (Health and Safety project Specification 1126901-SP-0001).
All items of plant, Equipment and vehicles travelling within the Site shall be equipped with fully
operational amber rotating flashing lights. All vehicles shall be roadworthy and shall at all times adhere
to all traffic signage and speed limits.
All employees of the Contractors will undergo entry medicals before the commencement of the project
and thereafter on an annual basis inclusive of exit medicals at the Coega Development Corporation
(CDC). Medicals to include drug testing
Trainings as stipulated in the HS project specification will be conducted by relevant Contractors

employees before the commencement of the project
All will comply with PPE requirements as mentioned in this document as well as HS project specification
taking note that only long sleeve pants and shirts are allowed to be worn on site
Transportation of employees will not be allowed at the back of bakkies.
All permit costs required for any activities relating to the project shall be for the Contractors account.
The Contractor shall further comply with all applicable legislative requirements and standards with
respect to his own activities and others on the Site. A health and safety file to be submitted by the
Contractor for approval by the Employer or Employers representative before site access can be granted.
In addition, sufficient time to be allowed for health and safety file to be approved by TCP HS Staff as
well as TNPA SHEQ Department
6.4 Environmental Management

6.4.1 General
All work is to be conducted in accordance with the principles of the National Environmental Management
Act, 1998 (Act no 107 of 1998) as well as all other applicable legislation, regulations and the accepted
environmental good practice.
A project specific Construction Environmental Management Programme (CEMPr) has been compiled
and is included under Annexure D (Environmental Management Programme). The CEMPr has been
aligned with the Port of Ngqura Environmental Authorisations and Environmental Requirements
The CEMPr provides an integrated approach to environmental management. This approach is designed
to guide the appropriate allocation of human resources, assign responsibilities, develop procedures and

FOR BERTH B100
ensure project compliance with regulatory and best practice requirements. The CEMPr is the minimum
acceptable standard for the Project that shall be complied with at all times. The CEMPr requirements
shall be applicable to the main Contractor and all its service providers.
The Contractor must sign the declaration of understanding as a commitment to abide with the Project
CEMPr and TCP Environmental Governance Framework. Sufficient environmental budget must be
allocated to meet all the project environmental requirements for the duration of the contract.
The Contractor shall perform the Works and all construction activities within the Site and Working Areas
having due regard for the environment and environmental management practices as more particularly
described within the CEMPr.
The Contractor must appoint a suitably qualified Environmental Officer with a relevant environmental
qualification and a minimum of 5 years relevant construction environmental management experience.
The roles and responsibilities of the Contractor’s EO are clearly outlined in the CEMPr. The appointed
EO is required to be on site daily on a full time basis. Alternative arrangements must be made where
night shifts are proposed. In such instances an EO must be on site for a minimum of 4 hours of the
shift. The EO must be a dedicated resource to the environmental discipline and may not be shared
with any other discipline on site such as Health and Safety or Quality.
The Contractor will be required to submit an environmental file to TCP post award of tender. Particular
requirements of the Employer will be made known on award of the contract. A Site access certificate
shall not be granted until the environmental file has been approved by the Employer.
6.4.2 Environmental Obligation
The overarching obligations of the Contractor in terms of the CEMPr before construction activities
commence on the Site and/or Working Areas is to provide environmental method statements for
all construction operations at the Site and/or Working Area and where requested by the
Construction Manager. The Contractor shall comply with the following:
i. The Contractor shall identify the kinds of environmental impacts that will occur as a result
of their activities and accordingly prepare separate method statements describing how
each of these impacts will be prevented or managed so that the standards set out in the
CEMPr are achieved.
ii. Environmental method statements will be prepared in accordance with the requirements
set out in the CEMPr. These method statements shall form part of the environmental file.
iii. The Contractor shall ensure that his management, foremen and the general workforce, as
well as all suppliers and visitors to Site have attended the Environmental Induction
Programme prior to commencing any work on Site.
iv. If new personnel commence work on the Site during construction, the Contractor shall
ensure that these personnel undergo the Environmental Induction Programme and are
made aware of the environmental specifications on Site.
The Contractor shall take note of the environmental sensitivity of the Project area and surrounding
areas and shall erect and maintain a highly visible temporary fence/barrier along the boundaries
of the Site and around any no-go areas that may be pointed out by the Project Environmental
Manager. Site demarcation must be done and be in place prior to commencement of any
construction related activity, to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager and Project
Environmental Manager.
The Contractor must take note of various environmental monitoring requirements during
construction, as specified by the CEMPr, and must make adequate allowance for undertaking
specified monitoring.
The Contractor must appoint a waste removal Service Providers as per the TNPA list of waste
removal Service Providers (to be provided after contract award).
During the construction period, the Contractor shall comply with the following:

FOR BERTH B100
i. Upon award the Contractor will receive a CD containing, but not limited to the
environmental file templates and copies of the project’s EA, permits and licences and
CEMPr;
ii. A copy of the project’s EA, permits and licences, CEMPr and method statements shall be
available on Site, and the Contractor shall ensure that all the personnel on Site (including
subcontractors and their staff) as well as suppliers are familiar with and understand the
specifications contained in these documents;
iii. The Contractor must sign a Declaration of understanding (T2.2.38) as part of a returnable
acknowledging understanding of the environmental requirements for the Project.
Furthermore, sufficient environmental budget must be allocated for the implementation of
environmental management requirements.
iv. Method statements that are required during construction must be submitted to the Project
Manager for approval at least 20 days prior to the proposed commencement of the
activity. Emergency construction activity method statements may also be required. The
activities requiring method statements cannot commence if the method statements have
not been approved by the Project Manager. The scope of the required method statements
for completion by the Contractor shall, as a minimum, include all such items as are listed
within the CEMPr;
v. Where applicable, the Contractor shall provide job-specific training on an ad hoc basis
when workers are engaged in activities, which require method statements.
The Contractor shall ensure that anyone making deliveries to Site is properly informed of all
procedures and restrictions, e.g. which access roads to use, no go areas, speed limits, noise and
the like, as required by the relevant project Authorisations and the CEMPr, before they arrive at
Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for rehabilitation/reinstatement and cleaning all areas to the
satisfaction of the TCP Project Environmental Manager or Environmental Officer as detailed in
the CEMPr.
6.5 Quality Assurance Requirements

6.5.1 General Requirements
The Contractor shall execute the works in accordance with the project specification General Quality
Requirements for Contractors and Suppliers included in Annexure F (General Quality Requirements for
Contractors and Suppliers) of the Works Information.
The Contractor’s Quality Management System shall conform to the International ISO 9001 Standard or
an equivalent standard acceptable to the Project Manager.
Prior to the commencement of the works on Site, the Contractor shall submit his quality assurance
proposal(s) to the Employer for review. Works on Site may only commence once these proposals have
been approved by the Employer.
This proposal shall detail the Contractor’s quality management system as it applies to all aspects of
supply or service provision, including design, procurement, manufacturing, construction, installation,
erection and commissioning. The Contractor shall make allowance for the provision of suitably qualified
quality control staff to manage and carry out inspection on all supplier/subcontractor activities in all
disciplines included within the Works Information.
6.5.2 Quality Policy

The Quality Policy is a concise document, approved by the Contractor's executive management that
defines organisational goals and objectives with regard to quality, a commitment to meeting stated
requirements and an undertaking to drive continuous improvement throughout the organisation’s
activities. It must be suitable for the organisation and provide a framework for establishing,
communicating and monitoring performance against agreed quality objectives.

FOR BERTH B100
6.5.3 Project Quality Plan

The Contractor shall submit a Project Quality Plan (PQP), which shall also contain specific proposals
and details with regard to quality control (QC) for the scope of the works.
The PQP includes the Contractor’s statement that outlines strategy, methodology, resources allocation,
QA and quality control co-ordination activities to ensure that the works meet the standards stated in the
Works Information.
The PQP is generally in narrative form detailing the Project Specific QA and QC systems and controls
required by the Contractor for the specific works.
The requirements for a PQP are detailed in the project standard and shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
i. Include all quality activities relevant to the works, identifying all procedures, reviews, audits,
controls and records used to control and verify compliance with the specified contractual
requirements;
ii. Include a listing of all special processes (e.g. welding and non-destructive testing, cube
testing, etc.) envisaged for use, including confirmation of personnel certification as
required;
iii. Include a list of all proposed method statements for Site-based work activities;
iv. Include a description of the Contractor’s project organization, with key positions and
responsibilities identified and individuals named. The organization structure shall also
indicate the resources committed to the management / coordination of QA / QC activities,
both within the Contractor’s organization and that of his subcontractors and suppliers;
v. Include a listing of all Quality Control Plans (QCP’s), and associated Field Inspection
Checklists (FIC’s), as applicable;
vi. Identify in the PQP any supplier/subcontractor work. Supplier/subcontractor quality plans
shall be approved by the Contractor, and a copy forwarded to the Project Manager for
approval;
vii. Include the proposed Authorized Inspection Authority (where applicable - for pressurized
equipment and systems);
viii. Include a Data Book Index, scheduling the proposed quality records that will form the
permanent record of conformance to requirements.
6.5.4 Submissions and Records

The Contractor submits his Quality Management System documents to the Project Manager as
part of his programme under ECC3 Clause 31.2 to include details of:
i. PQP for the contract;

ii. Quality Policy;
iii. Index of procedures to be used;
iv. A schedule of internal and external audits during the contract.
The Contractor develops and maintains a comprehensive register of documents that will be
generated throughout the works, including all quality related documents as part of its Quality Plan.
The Project Manager indicates those documents required to be submitted for information, review
or acceptance and the Contractor indicates such requirements within his register of documents.
The register shall indicate the dates of issue of the documents and the dates upon which the
Project Manager responded to documents submitted by the Contractor.
The index of procedures shall contain a list of the Contractor's quality management system
procedures to be applied during the course of the works, including any relevant instructions or
3rd tier quality system documentation. Where aspects of the works are to be subcontracted, the
Contractor shall include procedures for the management of suppliers and subcontractors.

FOR BERTH B100
A schedule of internal and external audits shall be included in the Contractor’s PQP, detailing the
location, frequency and extent of internal and external quality system audits to be carried out
during the contract period. The schedule shall include all locations at which such audits are
carried, i.e. the Contractor’s offices and construction Sites, as well as the premises of suppliers
and service providers.
6.5.5 Staffing
The Contractor shall nominate a suitably experienced quality representative for all aspects of the
works, including general Site activities, with a staff complement that is adequate to perform the
requirements of the PQP.
The Contractor shall submit the CV of his nominated quality representative for the Project
Manager’s review and approval.
6.6 Programming and Progress Reporting

6.6.1 General
The contract programme, progress reports, subsequent updates, revisions and supplementary
programmes as detailed in this section are an essential part of the project control system used
by the Employer for managing the works and in monitoring progress of the works. Key dates and
completion dates, as defined in the Contract Data, are incorporated into the programme.
6.6.2 Tender Schedule

The Contractor’s detailed programme, which complies with the requirements as indicated in the
Works Information, shall be submitted in both hard and soft copy forms. Primavera P6 version
8.2 is being used by the Employer for planning on the project. The Contractor shall use a suitable
computerised planning package (Primavera, MS Projects), as approved by the Project Manager.
The activity durations are estimated in working days and shall be realistic and based on quantities
and applied resources.
The calendars used are based on normal working hours per day and working days per week, or
as prescribed by the Project Manager.
6.6.3 Network
The Critical Path Method (CPM) technique of planning and scheduling will be used for the project.
The Contractor shall provide a programme showing the critical path(s), together with a total float
report for acceptance by the Project Manager.
The programme network shall have no fewer activities than the technical and commercial
breakdowns listed in the activity programme.
Networks are constructed to reflect the sequence of activities, using resource scheduling to
stagger the performance of activities into the most probable sequence.
The activity durations are estimated in working days and shall be realistic and based on quantities
and applied resources.
The calendars used are based on normal working hours per day and working days per week, or
as prescribed by the Project Manager in accordance with the contract.
6.6.4 Structure and Methodology

FOR BERTH B100
The programme layouts shall take into account the approved Facility Breakdown Structure (FBS),
reflecting the manner in which the works are to be performed. The following levels of programme
are to be used for this project:
i. Level 1 Master Programme - defines the major activities and interfaces between
engineering, procurement, fabrication and construction, transportation, installation, and
pre-commissioning, commissioning, and start-up. This is a high level summary
programme, and is included in the monthly progress report.
ii. Level 2 Project Programme - summary programme "rolled up" from the level 3 project
programme. The structure and layout will be in accordance with the FBS as defined in
the Level 3 programme.
iii. Level 3 Project Programme - detailed programme, which is generated for tracking and
control of various activities and deliverables for all phases of the project. The activities
will be coded in accordance with the FBS. Various layouts and corresponding filters can
be developed to reflect the requirements of the project leads and managers.
iv. Level 4 Project Programme - This detailed, discipline-specific programme is developed
and maintained by the Contractor and generated for tracking and control of various
activities and deliverables for all phases of the project. This programme utilizes the FBS
structure and relates to the programmed activities in the pricing activity programme or
groups of activities. The programme represents the day-to-day activities by discipline that
are work-unit based and become summarized in the Level 3 activities.
6.6.5 Progress Reporting and Reports

1. Reporting and Monitoring:
To demonstrate the actual progress and forecast completion of the works, the Contractor shall,
on a weekly basis, update and submit to the Project Manager the latest accepted programme and
progress report, including histograms and S- curves.
Monitoring and review of the progress of the works shall consist of an assessment of all activities
currently in progress to determine percentage complete, forecast completion dates, manning
histogram, showing plan versus forecast, deviations from the target programme and actions
required for remedy.
Weekly progress review meetings shall be conducted to report and assist control of the works.
2. Reports:
i. Level 4 Programme - updated weekly, showing two separate bars for each task, i.e. the
primary bar shall reflect the current forecast dates and the secondary bar the latest
accepted programme.
ii. 3-Week Look-Ahead Programme - in the same format as above, updated and issued
weekly.
iii. Manpower Histogram - updated and issued weekly, showing actual, forecast and
planned manpower utilization.
iv. S-curves - updated and issued weekly, showing actual % complete versus planned %
for the overall contract and utilizing the earned values as calculated by the detailed
progress report.
v. Detailed progress report - updated and issued weekly, utilizing a spreadsheet to
calculate earned progress of activities, as reflected on the Level 4 programme, based on
installed quantities. Activities shall be weighted using man-hours. Report shall indicate
progress ‘this period’ and ‘progress to date’.
vi. Weekly report - a narrative report consisting of an executive summary, area/facility
synopsis of the works that are in progress and critical action items (top 10). The report
shall be accompanied with a 3-week look-ahead programme and s-curve. A weekly health
and safety report is to be submitted.

FOR BERTH B100
vii. Monthly report - a narrative status report submitted a week before the last Friday of each
month, or as required by the Project Manager. The report shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
a. Summary of progress achieved during the reporting period;

b. Latest updated programme;
c. Project milestones table – planned versus actual and forecast;
d. Status and performance of on-Site works;
e. Status and performance of off-Site works;
f. Histograms and s-curves;
g. Critical action items list (top 10).
h. Health and safety monthly report
6.7 Contractor’s Management, Supervision and Key People

The Contractor provides an organogram of all his key people, as required by the Employer and as stated
in the Contract Data, and how such key people communicate with the Project Manager and the
Supervisor and their delegates.
The Contractor appoints an EO as a key person under ECC Clause 24.1. The EO ensures that the
works, including all parts thereof, are undertaken subject to prior environmental method statement(s),
approved by the Project Manager, and ensures that all the project’s EA, permits and licences and
CEMPR are implemented by the Contractor in a timely and proper manner.
The EO provides the Project Manager with all environmental method statements for approval prior to
commencing with the required works. The EO tasks are:
i. Daily, weekly, and monthly inspections of the Site and working areas. Monitor compliance with
the project’s EA, permits and licences and CEMPr
ii. Reporting of environmental incidents to the Project Manager;
iii. Attendance at all SHE meetings, toolbox talks and induction programmes;
iv. Litter control and ensuring the Contractor clears litter from the Site;
v. Ensuring that environmental signage and barriers are correctly placed;
vi. The EO submits daily, weekly and monthly checklists to the Employer’s EO/ECO.
The Contractor nominates a CIRP as a key person under ECC Clause 24.1. The CIRP is based on Site
and ensures that all reports and IR requests are submitted accurately and in a timely manner to the
Project Manager. The Contractor is referred to Annexure F (Industrial Relations Policy and Management
Plan). The CIRP tasks are:
i. Dedicated to human resources, industrial relations and any other Contractor employee related
functions;
ii. Resolve all human resources and industrial relations matters arising from the Contractor’s
employees;
iii. Represent the Contractor at all industrial relations meetings.
6.8 Training Workshops and Documentation

The Contractor facilitates the following requirements for training workshops:
i. Pre-mobilization workshop, scheduled for one week prior to Site establishment. Workshop will be
attended by the Site management team including Site agents, all Contractor’s supervisors and
safety personnel. Additional training will include, but is not limited to, SOC training as well as
DSTI training,
ii. Formal training as stipulated in the Health and Safety Project Specification 1126901-SP-0001 to
be attended by Contractors identified personnel before commencement of any works
The Contractor provides the following documentation to the Employer:

FOR BERTH B100
i. Health and Safety file, including Health and Safety Management Plan but not limited to:
ii. Valid Company Letter of Good Standing
iii. Medical certificates of fitness
iv. Incident Management procedures;
v. Performance Reporting;
vi. Site Training Packages;
vii. Safe Work Method Statements;
viii. Safety Procedures;
ix. Risk Assessment Process and as well as risk assessments for all activities;
x. Insurance provided by the Employer;
xi. Insurance provided by the Employer is contained in the Contract Data – Part 1
6.9 Contract Change Management

No additional requirements apply to ECC3 Clause 60 series.
6.10 Provision of Bonds and Guarantees

The form in which the bond or guarantee is to be provided by the Contractor is given in Part 1:
Agreements and Contract Data, Document C1.3, Forms of Securities.
The Contractor provides a bond or guarantee as required by the Conditions of Contract concurrent with
the execution by the parties of the Form of Agreement for the ECC.

FOR BERTH B100
8 PLANT AND MATERIALS

The Contractor provides plant and materials for inclusion in the works in accordance with COLTO 1208
Item (e), unless stated otherwise in the Works Information provided by the Employer. All Plant and
Materials are new, unless the use of old or refurbished goods and/or materials are expressly permitted
as stated elsewhere in this Works Information, or as may be subsequently instructed by the Project
Manager.
The Contractor replaces any Plant and Materials subject to breakages (whether in the working areas or
not) or any plant and materials not conforming to standards or specifications stated and notifies the
Project Manager and the Supervisor on each occasion where replacement is required.

FOR BERTH B100
ANNEXURE A: TENDER SPECIFICATIONS,

DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS

FOR BERTH B100
This is the list of specifications issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and which apply to this
contract.

1126901-001-SP-0001 1 Fire Water Pump Package Specification
1126901-001-SP-0002 1 Pump Caisson Specification
1126901-001-SP-0003 1 Foam Monitor Package Specification
1126901-001-SP-0004 1 Portable Foam Monitor Package Specification
1 Piping Specification for Fabrication, Erection, Testing and
1126901-001-SP-0005
Inspection
1126901-001-SP-0006 1 Piping line class specification for fire-water
1126901-001-SP-0007 1 Piping line class specification for diesel
1126901-001-SP-0008 1 Piping line class specification for foam concentrate
Commissioning is done according to this template:

1126901-PLN-0009 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Commissioning Management Plan
This is the list of drawings issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and which apply to this
contract.
Rev
No.
Process Schematics
1126901-1-B01-M-PI-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Fighting P&ID
1126901-1-B01-M-PF-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Process Flow Diagram
Locality Plan
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0013-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Locality Plan
Mechanical Drawings
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0007-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection General Piping Arrangement
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0009-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Mechanical works at Loading
Facility Layout and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0010-01 Berth B100 Fire Protection Southern Mechanical works
1A
Layout and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0009-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump Caisson Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0012-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Booster Details

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0013-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump In Connection Details
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0004-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Hydrant Coverage Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0005-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Monitor Coverage Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0007-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Fighting Equipment Layout
Piping Isometric Drawings
SW-B100-2001-CSL140
SW-B100-2002-CSL140
SW-B100-2003-CSL140
SW-B100-2004-CSL140
SW-B100-2005-CSL140
SW-B100-2006-CSL140
SW-B100-2007-CSL140
SW-B100-2008-CSL140
SW-B100-2009-CSL140
SW-B100-2010-CSL140
1126901-1-B01-M-IS-0011-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Fabrication Isometric for 200-
SW-B100-2011-CSL140
SW-B100-2012-CSL140
SW-B100-2013-CSL140
SW-B100-3001-CSL140
FS-B100-3002-CSL140
SW-B100-3003-CSL140
FS-B100-3004-CSL140
FC-B100-4001-SS140
FC-B100-4002-SS140
FC-B100-4003-SS140

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
SW-B100-5001-CSL140
SW-B100-5002-CSL140
D-B100-2015-CS140
D-B100-2016-CS140
D-B100-2017-CS140
D-B100-2019-CS140
D-B100-2020-CS140
D-B100-2021-CS140
Civil and Structural Drawings
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0001-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Civil Works Site Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0002-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Civil Works at Loading Facility
Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0003-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Southern Civil Works Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0008-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Foundation and
Surface bed Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0009-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Tower Layouts and
Elevations
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0014-01 0A B100 Fire Protection Civil Works at South of Loading
Facility Layouts
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0002-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Civil works at Loading Facility
Sections and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0003-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Southern Civil works Sections
and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0004-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Sections and
Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0005-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Spill Slab Sections and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0006-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Pump House Pipe Supports
and Details
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0008-01 0A Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Tower Access Ladder
and Platform
1126901-1-B01-M-DE-0016-01 0A B100 Fire Protection Culvert Civil Works Sections and
Details
Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0005-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-01 Monitor controls
hydraulic pump MCC general arrangement
1126901-1-B01-M-GA-0006-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-02 Distribution Board
General Arrangement
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0010-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Electrical Layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0011-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire pump house electrical
layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0012-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire pump house
instrumentation layout
1126901-1-B01-M-LA-0013-01 1 Berth A100 / B100 Fire Protection Gas Detector Support
1126901-1-B01-M-PL-0001-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Electrical Block Diagram
1126901-1-B01-M-SD-0003-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Control Interconnection Loop
Drawing
1126901-1-B01-M-SL-0001-01 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection FCP-02 Single Line Diagram
This is the list of engineering schedules and lists issued by the Employer at or before the Contract
Date and which apply to this contract.
Rev
Document No. Description
No.
1126901-001-EL-0002 0 Berth B100 Fire Protection Mechanical Equipment List
1126901-001-LL-0002 0 Berth B100 Fire Protection Piping Line List
1126901-001-VL-0002 0 Berth B100 Fire Protection Piping Valve List
1126901-001-CS-0002 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Cable Schedule

FOR BERTH B100
This is the list of technical data sheets issued by the Employer at or before the Contract Date and
which apply to this contract.
Rev
No.
Mechanical
1126901-000-DS-0031 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Diesel Supply
1126901-000-DS-0032 Tank
1126901-000-DS-0033 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Air Eliminator
1126901-000-DS-0034 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Relief Valve
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Test
1126901-000-DS-0035 Arrangement Flowmeter
1126901-000-DS-0036 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Fire Water Pump Caisson
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Station Pressure
1126901-000-DS-0037 Regulating Valve
1126901-000-DS-0038 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Station Inline Inductor
1126901-000-DS-0039 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Monitor
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Concentrate Supply
1126901-000-DS-0040 Tank
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam Concentrate Circulation
1126901-000-DS-0041 Pump
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Foam concentrate relief valve
1126901-000-DS-0042 datasheet
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Pressure Sustaining Valve for
1126901-000-DS-0052 Pump Minimum Flow
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Municipal Supply Pressure
1126901-000-DS-0053 Reducing Valve
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Pressure Reducing Valve for
1126901-000-DS-0054 Pump House Sprinklers
1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Restriction Orifice for Pump
1126901-000-DS-0055 Minimum Flow
1126901-000-DS-0056 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Municipal Supply Water Meter
Piping
1
1126901-000-DS-0017 Fire water gate valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0018 1 Fire water butterfly valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0019 1 Fire water ball valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0020 1 Fire water non-return valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0021 1 Fire water backflow preventer datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0022 1 Foam concentrate ball valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0023 1 Foam concentrate non return valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0024 1 Diesel ball valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0025 1 Diesel non return valve datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0026 1 Foam concentrate hose datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0027 1 Pressure indicator datasheet

FOR BERTH B100
Rev
No.
Fire Fighting
1126901-000-DS-0013 1 Fire Hose Reel
1126901-000-DS-0014 1 Fire Hydrant
1126901-000-DS-0015 1 Potable Foam Monitor
1126901-000-DS-0016 1 Portable Monitor Foam Concentrate Tanks
1126901-000-DS-0028 1 Foam Concentrate Datasheet
1126901-000-DS-0051 1 Fire Main Booster Connection
Instrumentation
1126901-000-DS-0043 2 Hydrocarbon gas detector
1126901-000-DS-0044 2 Foam concentrate tank level transmitter
1126901-000-DS-0046 2 Pressure transmitter

REPORTS
Note: In all cases check against online version for the latest revision prior to use
REPORT
For: Fire Water Pump Package Specification
Project Name: Port of Ngqura Liquid Bulk Berth A100 and B100
Fire Protection
Project Number: 1126901.001
Author: Jonathan Kearney

Owner: Transnet
Client: Transnet Capital Projects
Project Sponsor: Transnet Group Capital
Project Manager: Gavin Theron
Revision Number: 1
Approved by: Gavin Theron
Release Date: 18/08/2017

Print Date: 21/08/2017
Template Date: 01/05/2012
Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0001
Distribution
Name Title
Phathiswa Fotoyi Project Manager
1126901-001-SP-0001_Rev 1 -
Fire Pump Specification Fire Water Pump Package Specification Page 1 of 11
© Transnet
- Company Confidential -
Kantey & Templer (Pty)Ltd Transnet
Fire Water Pump Package Date: 21/08/2017
Specification
PORT OF NGQURA LIQUID BULK BERTH A100 AND B100 FIRE PROTECTION
FIRE WATER PUMP PACKAGE SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1 Introduction 4
1.1 Background 4
1.2 Scope of supply 4
2 Codes and standards 5

2.1 South African regulations: 5
2.2 Transnet specifications and standards: 5
2.3 International codes and standards 5
3 General requirements 6
3.1 Units of measurement 6
3.2 Packaging, storage and preservation 6
4 Equipment specifications 7
4.1 Pump performance 7
4.2 Material selection 7
4.3 Equipment selection 7
4.4 Pump caissons 7
4.5 Noise emissions 7
4.6 Machine guards 7
5 Quality 9
5.1 General 9
5.2 Quality plan 9
5.3 Design documentation 9
5.4 Materials 9
5.5 Welding 9
5.6 Balancing 9
5.7 Hydrostatic pressure testing 10
5.8 Shop performance testing 10
5.9 Field performance testing 10
6 Documentation 11
6.1 General 11
6.2 Quotation 11
6.3 Quality assurance 11
6.4 Operating manual 11
1126901-001-SP-0001_Rev 1 - - Company Confidential - Page 3 of 11

Fire Pump Specification
Specification
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
Transnet Group Capital is developing a new bulk liquids berth at the Port of Ngqura in Port Elizabeth,
Berth A100. In addition, a temporary berth at the existing B100 Berth is to be established. This
purchase specification is for the fire pumps to be installed at the liquid berths.
1.2 Scope of supply
This specification is applicable to the fire pump packages to be supplied for either Berth A100 or B100
at Port of Ngqura. The Purchaser shall state the location of the pumps to be supplied and provide the
applicable layouts and datasheets applicable to that berth. The Manufacturer shall ensure that the
pumps and associated equipment supplied are suitable for the conditions specified.
The fire pump packages for each berth includes:
 Two vertical turbine fire pumps (Duty / Standby)
 Two pump caissons to be attached to the pump house floor for housing the pumps
 Two right angled gear boxes to suit the selected pump
 Two drive shafts complete with couplings and enclosure
 Two diesel engine pump drivers
 The diesel engine cooling system from the pump discharge including all necessary pressure
regulators and overpressure protection
 Two diesel engine exhausts and silencers including lagging for all hot surfaces
 Two diesel engine air intake ducts from the engine to an opening in the pump house walls
 Two fuel storage tanks
 Two pump discharge air eliminators
 Two fire pump main relief valves
 One fire pump pressure sustaining valve
 One test arrangement flow meter
The package excludes:
 Pipe-work
 Manual valves
 Check valve
 Pressure indicator

Specification
2 CODES AND STANDARDS
The fire pumps package shall be designed, fabricated, tested, inspected, packed and delivered
according to the following codes and standards.
2.1 South African regulations:
Act 85 of 1993 Occupational Health and Safety Act
2.2 Transnet specifications and standards:
PORTNET Port Engineers Handbook, Volumes 1 and 2, 1994

DOC-STD-0001 Transnet Capital Projects Document Management Contractor
Documentation Submittal Requirements
2.3 International codes and standards
AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

EN 10204 Metallic Products: Types of inspection documents
ISO 1940 Mechanical vibration -- Balance quality requirements for rotors in a
constant (rigid) state
NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection

Specification
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Units of measurement
Units of measurements shall be according to SI units. In cases where the manufacturer uses Imperial
or American units, conversions shall be provided on documentation including specifications, drawings,
test reports and manuals.
In particular, the following units of measurement shall apply:
Pressure Kilopascal kPa
Dimensions Millimetres mm
Mass Kilograms kg
Pump head Meters m
Pump Flow Cubic metres per hour m3/hr
Velocity Metres per second m/s
Power Kilowatts kW
Volume litres l
3.2 Packaging, storage and preservation
All items to be shipped shall be packaged in accordance with international packaging standards.
The onus shall be on the manufacturer to ensure packaging is designed to protect the equipment
from damage in transit from reasonable wear and tear arising from handling.
Packaging shall be designed for storage of equipment on site for up to six months in an outdoor
environment.
The manufacturer shall provide a specification for long term storage and preservation of the
equipment as well as precautions, inspections and maintenance required prior to installation and
start-up following storage for an extended storage period of time

Specification
4 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Pump performance
The pumps shall comply with NFPA 20 and the pump datasheet. The Manufacture shall refer to the
pump installation general arrangement drawing and piping and instrument diagram to ensure the
selected pump suits the system.
It is not required to supply a listed fire pump. However, the selected pump must comply NFPA 20
requirements and be acceptable to the Transnet National Port Authority Chief Fire Officer. The
manufacturer must be able to demonstrate past experience and performance of the proposed pump
and provide references for similar installations.
All rotating components shall be analysed to ensure no torsional vibration. A complete mass elastic
torsional vibration analysis shall be provided.
The pump shall be able to operate at all flow conditions including shut-off without cavitation or
experiencing excessive vibration.
4.2 Material selection
The pumps shall be installed submerged in sea water at the Port of Ngqura in South Africa. All
materials shall be suitable for the marine environment.
The pump strainer and the strainer on the pump caisson shall be constructed of materials and
coatings that are resistant to marine fouling and growth of mussels and other marine life. The use of
chemical dosing or toxic coatings of any kind is prohibited.
Components that are subject to marine growth that affect the pump performance shall be readily
accessible for inspection, cleaning and replacement by trained divers.
4.3 Equipment selection
The manufacturer shall supply equipment in accordance with the datasheets. However, the
manufacturer remains responsible for the performance of the pump system and shall ensure that all
equipment included in the scope of supply is suitable.
4.4 Pump caissons
Pump caissons shall be designed and fabricated according project specification 1126901-001-SP-
0002.
4.5 Noise emissions
Noises calculations shall be provided for the complete pump assembly and diesel engine stating
expected noise pressure levels in dBA.
The Manufacturer shall propose methods of reducing noise to below 85 dBA and include the cost of
noise reduction in the quotation.
4.6 Machine guards
Moving machinery shall be guarded in accordance with South Africa regulations.

All rotating parts shall be guarded such no moving part can be reached. Guards shall be fabricated
from steel plate and shall completely enclose the moving part. Mesh guards shall only be allowed if
located more than 150 mm from the moving component. Mesh size shall not be larger than 10mm.
Gaps between guards and the equipment shall be less than 6 mm.

Specification
Guards shall be easily removable for maintenance and secured to the equipment with machine
screws. Openings with hatches or access doors shall be lockable. Guards shall be coated for a C5
marine environment.

Specification
5 QUALITY
5.1 General
The manufacturer shall be ISO 9000 certified.

Alternatively, the manufacturer shall follow an ISO 9000 based quality system subject to the
acceptance thereof by Transnet who shall have the right to review the quality system and conduct
random quality audits of the manufacturer and any suppliers.
5.2 Quality plan
The manufacturer shall produce a quality plan detailing all significant steps in the design, fabrication,
testing and inspection of the fire pumps and associated equipment. The plan shall reference
applicable documentation and indicate hold points, witness points, surveillance points and review
points.
Fabrication shall not commence before the quality control plan has been reviewed and accepted by
Transnet or authorised representative.
5.3 Design documentation
Calculations and analysis shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 20. These shall be issued to
Transnet for review and acceptance.
General arrangement drawings shall be issue to Transnet for approval prior to any fabrication.
The final drawing shall be updated “As-built” with actual dimensions as fabricated.
5.4 Materials
All material including welding consumables shall be traceable and the materials certificates for all
materials shall be provided as part of the quality data-book with the end of job documentation.
Material certificates shall be in accordance with EN 10204 type 3.1.
All materials shall be in accordance with recognised ASTM or EN standards.
5.5 Welding
Weld procedure specifications, weld procedure qualifications and welder qualification records shall be
issued to Transnet for acceptance prior to fabrication.
Welding procedure qualifications must include corrosion testing of the qualified welds to ensure
chemical properties are retained.
All welds shall be indicated on a weld map drawing and reference the weld procedure and welder.
All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.6 and all procedures and welders shall be qualified
accordingly.
All weld splatter, weld heat tint, crayon marks, arc strikes, undercuts and any similar surface defects
shall be prevented and removed if present.
No carbon steel shall be fabricated in the same area as stainless steel.
All stainless steel welds shall be pickled and passivated.
5.6 Balancing
The pump rotating assembly components shall be balanced to minimum ISO 1940 grade 2.5 or
better.
Factory vibration tests shall be carried out on the fully assembled unit and included in the handover
documentation.

Specification
5.7 Hydrostatic pressure testing
Pressure retaining parts shall be hydro-tested and the pressure test certificate shall be included in the
handover documentation.
5.8 Shop performance testing
A certified test curve shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 20. The test shall be witnessed by
Transnet or authorised representative. Acceptance shall be in accordance with NFPA 20.
5.9 Field performance testing
A field performance test shall be carried out in accordance with NFPA 20. The test shall be witnessed
by Transnet or authorised representative and the manufacturer’s representative. Acceptance shall be
in accordance with NFPA 20.

Specification
6 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 General
The manufacturer shall provide documentation in accordance with DOC-STD-003.

A document requirement register shall be agreed prior to order award and delivery of final accepted
documentation to Transnet is included in the scope of supply.
6.2 Quotation
The manufacturer shall provide the following technical documentation with the quotation:
 Document register
 Completed equipment datasheets for all items of equipment being offered
 Pump performance curve
 Valve dimensions and flow characteristics
 General arrangement drawing of the pump
 Engine specification and dimensions
 Materials of construction for each item of equipment
 Lists of recommended spares for start-up and commissioning
 Lists of recommended spares for 2 years’ operation including major strategic spares
 Utilities requirements
 Noise calculation and proposed noise attenuation housing
6.3 Quality assurance
The manufacturer shall provide a quality data-book comprising:

 Quality control plan
 Drawings
 Calculations and analysis
 Material certificates Type 3.1
 Internal inspection and test reports carried out during the manufacturing process
 Pressure test certificates
 Performance test certificates and curves
 Balancing certificates
 Vibration test certificates
 Equipment approval certificates for listed equipment
6.4 Operating manual
A comprehensive installation, operating and maintenance manual shall be provided including:

 All component Original Manufacturer Manuals including operating instructions, drawings and
specifications
 Technical specifications of the equipment
 Safety precautions
 Sectional drawings and parts lists
 Recommended spares complete with order details
 Details of special tools required
 Lubrication schedules
 Recommended maintenance intervals
 Installation instructions
 Operating and maintenance instructions

REPORTS
REPORT
For: Specification for Fire Pump Caissons
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0002
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0002 Rev 1 - Pump

Caisson Specification Specification for Fire Pump Caisson Page 1 of 9
© Transnet
Specification for Fire Pump Caissons Date: 18/08/2017
PORT OF NGQURA
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE PUMP CAISSONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1 Introduction 4
1.1 Background 4

2.3 South African National Standards: 5
3 General Requirements 6
4 Requirements 7
4.1 Design Criteria 7
5 Quality 8
5.1 General 8
5.2 Quality plan 8
5.4 Materials 8
5.5 Welding 8
5.6 Non-destructive Testing 8
5.7 Tolerances 8
6 Documentation 9
6.1 General 9
6.2 Quotation 9
6.4 Manual 9
1126901-001-SP-0002 Rev 1 - Pump - Company Confidential - Page 3 of 9

Caisson Specification
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
technical specification is for the fire pump caissons to be installed at the liquid berths. The pump
caissons shall provide a wet pit installation for the vertical turbine pumps to be used for fire water
supply. The caissons shall be installed below the pump house and extend into the sea.
1.2 Scope of supply
This specification is applicable to the fire pump caissons to be supplied for either Berth A100 or B100
at Port of Ngqura. The Purchaser shall state the location of the caissons to be supplied and provide
the applicable layouts and datasheets applicable to that berth. The Manufacturer shall ensure that the
pump caissons and associated equipment supplied are suitable for the conditions specified.
The scope of supply includes:
 Design of the pump caissons and pump intake screens
 Fabrication and supply of pump caissons to be attached to the pump house floor for housing
the pumps.
 Fabrication and supply of pump intake screens
 All necessary fasteners and appurtenant equipment
 Quality data-book
 Handover documentation

The pump caissons shall be designed, fabricated, tested, inspected, packed and delivered according
to the following codes and standards.

2.3 South African National Standards:
SANS 1700 Fasteners

SANS 10111 Code of Practice for Engineering Drawings
ASTM G48 Standard Test Methods for Pitting and Crevice Corrosion Resistance of
Stainless Steels and Related Alloys by Use of Ferric Chloride Solution
AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel
BS 6349-1 Maritime Works
EN 10204 Metallic Products: Types of inspection documents
NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection

Mass Kilograms kg
Pump head Meters m
Power Kilowatts kW
Volume litres l
environment.

4 REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Design Criteria
The pump caisson intake screen shall comply with NFPA 20 requirements for a wet pit installation of a
vertical turbine pump.
Structural design of the caisson shall be to an internationally recognised code or standard accepted
by Transnet. The caisson and attachments to the quay or berth piles shall be designed to handle the
static and dynamic loads imposed by the pumps, wave action, water level and water movement when
the pumps are operational.
The caissons shall be designed to be supported at the top by fastening to the floor of the pump
house.
The pumps shall be installed submerged in sea water at the Port of Ngqura in South Africa. All
materials shall be suitable for the marine environment.
The pump caisson and strainer shall be constructed of materials and coatings that are resistant to
marine fouling including growth of mussels and other marine life. The use of chemical dosing or toxic
coatings of any kind is prohibited.
The Manufacturer shall propose materials best suited to the application and present these to Transnet
for acceptance at time of quotation.
Fasteners shall be readily accessible for inspection, cleaning and replacement by trained divers.
The material shall be selected with due consideration to preventing galvanic corrosion between the
pump and the caisson.

5 QUALITY
5.1 General

5.2 Quality plan
testing and inspection of the pump caissons. The plan shall reference applicable documentation and
indicate hold points, witness points, surveillance points and review points.
Calculations shall be provided to prove the structural integrity of the pump caissons. These shall be
issued to Transnet for review and acceptance.
General arrangement drawings shall be issue to Transnet for approval prior to any fabrication.
The manufacturer shall maintain strict control of drawing revisions issued to the workshop and shall
ensure that all fabrication is in accordance with the latest approved drawing at all time.
5.4 Materials
All material including welding consumables shall be traceable and the materials certificates for all
materials shall be provided as part of the quality data-book with the end of job documentation.
Material certificates shall be in accordance with EN 10204 type 3.1.
All materials shall be in accordance with recognised ASTM or EN standards.
5.5 Welding
Weld procedure specifications, weld procedure qualifications and welder qualification records shall be
issued to Transnet for acceptance prior to fabrication.
Welding procedure qualifications must include corrosion testing of the qualified welds to ensure
chemical properties are retained.
All welds shall be indicated on a weld map drawing and reference the weld procedure and welder.
All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.6 and all procedures and welders shall be qualified
accordingly.
All weld splatter, weld heat tint, crayon marks, arc strikes, undercuts and any similar surface defects
shall be prevented and removed if present.
No carbon steel shall be fabricated in the same area as stainless steel.
All stainless steel welds shall be pickled and passivated.
5.6 Non-destructive Testing
All welding shall be inspected using dye penetrant and acceptance shall be to applicable ASME
Section VIII Div. 1.
5.7 Tolerances
Fabrication tolerances shall be agreed with the pump manufacturer.

6 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 General

6.2 Quotation
 Technical description of the offer
 General arrangement of the pump caisson proposed
 Materials of construction
 Lists of recommended spares for 2 years operation including major strategic spares
The manufacturer shall provide a data-book of quality documentation including:

 Drawings
 Calculations
 Material certificates Type 3.1
 NDT inspection reports
6.4 Manual

 Installation instructions and drawings
 Maintenance instructions

REPORTS
REPORT
For: Fixed Water and Foam Monitor Specification
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0003
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0003 Rev 1 -
Fixed Foam Monitor
Specification Fixed Water and Foam Monitor Specification Page 1 of 9
© Transnet
Fixed Water and Foam Monitor Date: 21/08/2017
Specification
FIXED WATER AND FOAM MONITOR SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1 Introduction 4
1.1 Background 4

4.1 Performance of monitor and cannon 7
4.3 Electrical enclosures 7
4.4 Control panel 7
5 Quality 8
5.1 General 8
5.2 Quality plan 8
5.5 Factory acceptance test 8
6 Documentation 9
6.1 General 9
6.2 Quotation 9
1126901-001-SP-0003 Rev 1 - - Company Confidential - Page 3 of 9

Fixed Foam Monitor Specification
Specification
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
purchase specification is for the fixed water and foam monitors to be installed at the liquid berths.
1.2 Scope of supply
This specification is applicable to the fixed water / foam monitors to be supplied for either Berth A100
or B100 at Port of Ngqura. The Purchaser shall state the location of the monitors to be supplied and
provide the applicable layouts and datasheets applicable to that berth. The Manufacturer shall ensure
that the monitors and associated equipment supplied are suitable for the conditions specified.
The scope of supply for each berth includes:
 Two fixed installation monitors rated for 8500 l/min each and suitable for hydraulic control
 Two hydraulic unit for controlling the monitors
 Electrical control panel for remote control of the hydraulic circuits.
 Hydraulic hoses and connections
 Connections for remote electrical control of the monitor
 Self-aspirating foam cannons
 Hydraulically controlled blabber mouth for controlling the spray pattern remotely
The package excludes:
 Control cables from the control room to the hydraulic circuit controls
 Electrical power cables to the hydraulic unit.

Specification
The fixed water and foam monitors shall be designed, fabricated, tested, inspected, packed and
delivered according to the following codes and standards.

NFPA 11 Standard for Low-, Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam

Specification
Mass Kilograms kg
Pump head Meters m
Power Kilowatts kW
Volume litres l
environment.

Specification
4.1 Performance of monitor and cannon
The monitors shall comply with NFPA 11 and the foam monitor datasheet. The monitor shall be
designed for use with either sea water or sea water with 3% foam mix using the foam concentrate
specified on the datasheet. The equipment supplied shall have Lloyd’s Register, FM or UL Approval.
The monitors shall be installed at the Port of Ngqura in South Africa. All materials shall be suitable for
the marine environment.
Metal surfaces susceptible to corrosion shall be epoxy coated for a C5 marine environment.
4.3 Electrical enclosures
The hydraulic units shall be suitable for a Zone 1 hazardous area. The electrical remote control panel
shall be located in a non-hazardous location in the control building.
4.4 Control panel
A control panel shall be provided for remote electrical control of the hydraulic circuits. The control
shall be by means of a joy-stick controlling the monitor horizontal and vertical rotation as well as
controls for the foam spreader.
The monitor shall have local manual control.

Specification
5 QUALITY
5.1 General

5.2 Quality plan
testing and inspection of the fire pumps and associated equipment. The plan shall reference
applicable documentation and indicate hold points, witness points, surveillance points and review
points.
General arrangement drawings and electrical diagrams shall be issue to Transnet for approval prior to
and fabrication.
5.5 Factory acceptance test
The monitor, cannon, blabber mouth, hydraulic unit and control panel shall be assembled in the
workshop and fully tested prior to delivery. The testing shall be witnessed by Transnet
representatives.

Specification
6 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 General

6.2 Quotation
 Performance curves
 General arrangement drawings
 Control panel layout
 Electrical schematics

 Quality control plan
 Drawings
 Factory acceptance test certificate

 All component Original Manufacturer Manuals including operating instructions, drawings and
specifications
 Lubrication schedules
 Installation instructions

REPORTS
REPORT
For: Portable Water and Foam Monitor Specification
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0004
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0004 Rev 1 -
Portable Foam monitor Portable Water and Foam Monitor Specification Page 1 of 9
© Transnet
Portable Water and Foam Monitor Date: 21/08/2017
Specification
PORTABLE WATER AND FOAM MONITOR SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1 Introduction 4
1.1 Background 4

4.1 Performance of monitor and cannon 7
5 Quality 8
5.1 General 8
6 Documentation 9
6.1 General 9
6.2 Quotation 9

Portable Foam monitor
Specification
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
purchase specification is for the portable water and foam monitors to be supplied for use at the liquid
berths.
1.2 Scope of supply
This specification is applicable to the portable water / foam monitors to be supplied for either Berth
A100 or B100 at Port of Ngqura.
The scope of supply for each monitor includes:
 Portable monitors rated for 2000 l/min
 Self-aspirating and self-inducing foam cannons
 Connection hose and coupling for a 65mm SANS 1128 Hydrant
 Foam concentrate supply hose

Specification
The portable water and foam monitors shall be designed, fabricated, tested, inspected, packed and
delivered according to the following codes and standards.

NFPA 11 Standard for Low-, Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam

Specification
Mass Kilograms kg
Pump head Meters m
Power Kilowatts kW
Volume litres l
environment.

Specification
4.1 Performance of monitor and cannon
The monitors shall comply with NFPA 11 and the foam monitor datasheet. The monitor shall be
designed for use with either sea water or sea water with 3% foam mix using the foam concentrate
specified on the datasheet. The equipment supplied shall have Lloyd’s Register, FM or UL Approval.
The monitors shall be installed at the Port of Ngqura in South Africa. All materials shall be suitable for
the marine environment.
Metal surfaces susceptible to corrosion shall be epoxy coated for a C5 marine environment.

Specification
5 QUALITY
5.1 General


Specification
6 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 General

6.2 Quotation
 Performance curves
 General arrangement drawings

 Drawings
 Factory acceptance test certificate


REPORTS
REPORT
For: Piping Specification for Fabrication, Erection, Testing and

Inspection
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0005
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0005_Rev 1 - Piping Specification for Fabrication, Erection, Testing and

Piping Specification Inspection Page 1 of 11
© Transnet
Piping Specification for Fabrication, Date: 21/08/2017
Erection, Testing and Inspection
PIPING SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION, ERECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
PSL MEDIUM PRESSURE PIPELINES (SANS 1200L) 4

PSL 1 Supporting Specifications 4
PSL 2 Pipelines 4
PSL 3 Protection of Pipes and Specials 4
PSL 4 Gaskets 7
PSL 6 Welding Procedures 7
PSL 7 Procedure Qualification Tests 8
PSL 8 Weather 8
PSL 9 Preparation of Joint 8
PSL 10 Cutting and Welding Work – where applicable 8
PSL 11 Inspection 9
PSL 12 Radiographic Examination 9
PSL 13 Other Non-Destructive Tests 10
PSL 14 Standards of Acceptability 10
PSL 15 Repairs to Minor Faults 10
PSL 16 Tolerances 10
PSL 17 Testing 10

Piping Specification
PSL MEDIUM PRESSURE PIPELINES (SANS 1200L)
MECHANICAL WORKS – BULK LIQUIDS BERTH FIRE PROTECTION
PSL 1 Supporting Specifications
For piping and fittings, all work involving steel shall be carried out in accordance with SANS 1200L.
PSL 2 Pipelines
PSL 2.1 Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-clause 5.2.3 of SANS 1200 L jointing of pipes and
specials of all diameters shall be by flanged spool pieces.
PSL 2.2 The Piping material

The design pressures are specified in the relevant line class specifications:
1126901-001-SP-0006
1126901-001-SP-0007
1126901-001-SP-0008
PSL 2.6 Manufacture of Steel Pipes and Specials

Piping shall comply with API-5L-B (ASTM A106 B), according to availability as per Clause PSL 2.5
above.
Pipe shall have bevelled ends in accordance with ANSI B16.25.
Piping shall be delivered in a clean state, together with all relevant test and quality control
documentation as required by the specification.
PSL 3 Protection of Pipes and Specials
PSL 3.1 Internal Protection of pipes
Carbon steel pipe shall be internally coated with System IL-2 of the Polyglass UltraLife PipeCoat
specification. The lining is a Polyglass VE-series glass-flake vinyl-ester copolymer, to a DFT of 1000
micron.
The lining is to be applied by Corrocoat or approved applicator.
All lining is to be 100% spark tested to ensure full coverage.
PSL 3.2 External Protection of Below Ground Steel Piping (including trench piping)
PSL 3.2.1 General
Corrosion protection in the form of plastic wrapping of the steel pipelines shall be performed in
accordance with SANS 10129 (Latest edition) “Plastic Tape Wrapping of Steel Pipelines” as amplified
by this Specification.
The system shall normally consist of an inner laminated tape applied with a primer and an outer
pressure sensitive adhesive tape without primer. The coating shall extend 300mm above grade after
installation.
FOR THIS CONTRACT A FULL DOUBLE WRAP SHALL BE APPLIED.
Full double wrap shall mean that a double outer wrap shall be applied over a double inner wrap.

Double wrap means that the tape shall be lapped by half the width of the tape plus 25 mm minimum.
All overlaps on the inner and outer tapes shall be evenly staggered.
The definition above shall be read in conjunction with Clause 6 of SANS 10129 (Latest edition), but
shall prevail over the latter in case of inconsistencies.
PSL 3.2.2 Specification of Primer and Tapes and Standards
The materials required for the purpose of the pipeline wrapping shall conform in every respect with
SANS 1117 (Latest edition) “Plastic Wrappings for the Protection of Steel Pipelines” except as
modified hereunder.
The physical and electrical properties shall comply with Table 2, Type C, Materials PE (inner tape) and
Table 2, Type A, Materials PE (outer tape) of SANS 1117 (Latest edition) and in addition the following
requirements shall be fulfilled:
The minimum overall thickness shall be 1 500 microns.
The primer shall be suitable for manual application using a brush or roller.
The primer shall have drying characteristics suitable for the type of tape used and the method of
application of the tape.
The tapes shall be suitable for both manual and machine wrapping. The width of the tape shall be
compatible with the pipe diameter being wrapped and the method of wrapping.
The laminated and pressure sensitive tapes shall be supplied in rolls which shall be one continuous
length without any joints.
The width of the laminated and pressure sensitive tapes shall be the same, except for double inner
and double outer wrap as defined above.
The butyl layer on the laminated tape and primer shall have plastic flow properties to ensure intimate
contact with the pipe.
The inner tape shall be sufficiently pliable to conform to the pipe surface to which it must adhere.
The outer wrap shall be tough enough to withstand the abrasion of the backfill material and the
possibility of hydrocarbon contamination in the soil.
The component materials of both inner and outer tapes shall be completely compatible.
The Employer reserves the right to have the products supplied, tested to check compliance with the
Specifications, but failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities to ensure
such compliance.
PSL 3.2.3 Handling of Corrosion Protection Materials
The Contractor shall ensure that all primer is thoroughly stirred before application and that any
residual or contaminated primer shall be thoroughly cleaned from containers before new charges are
emptied into or placed therein.
PSL 3.2.4 Cleaning of Pipe Surface
No cleaning operations shall begin until the provisions of the Specification for welding or jointing have
been complied with.

The pipe surface shall always be thoroughly clean and dry at the time the primer is applied. All dirt,
grease, oil, rust, scale and other foreign matter shall be removed before the primer is applied (sand
blasting not required).
Corrosion protection wrapping shall not be applied when a strong wind is blowing or when it is raining
or is threatening to rain or the relative humidity is above 90%.
PSL 3.2.5 Priming
The interval between cleaning and priming shall be not more than 4 hours. Preparation shall be in
accordance with SANS 10129 (Latest edition) Clause 3.2.
The surface of the pipe, including the surface adjacent to welds shall be completely wetted by the
primer before application of the tape.
PSL 3.2.6 Wrapping
The tape shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of Clause 4.2.2 of SANS 10129
(Latest edition) and shall be free from all holidays, pinholes and other defects.
Adequate provision shall be made for the complete protection of the wrapping from physical damage
during pipe handling, lowering, bedding and backfilling operations.
Holiday detector testing shall be carried out on the full length of all wrapped pipes using a suitable
instrument of the “rolling spring” type. The holiday detector shall be supplied and operated by the
Contractor who will conduct the tests in the presence of the Engineer.
The voltage should be not more than 80% and not less than 50% of the stated breakdown voltage of
the tape being used.
Any visible physical damage to the wrapping and any holidays registered, shall be repaired as
recommended in Clause 4.2.3 of SANS 10129 (Latest edition) and re-tested.
Wrapping which is inadequately bonded, damaged by abrasion, below the minimum overlap or
thickness or defective in any other manner, shall be completely removed and new wrapping applied.
Buried fittings are to be coated with an inhibitive primer followed by inert mastic, and a petroleum
jelly impregnated tape. Finally, overwrap with pressure-sensitive PVC or polyethylene tape in
accordance with Clause 5.1 of SANS 10129 (Latest edition)
In addition, all below ground piping is to be laid underground with sufficient cover to avoid damage
by heavy axle loading.
Where space does not permit the base width for an earth bund around the pipes, the pipes are to be
encased with mass concrete.
Under railway tracks the pipes are to be laid in reinforced concrete pipe sleeves.
PSL 3.3 External Protection of New above Ground Piping
Pipes shall be externally coated using Polyglass 100 Zipcoat glass-flake polyester copolymer, with
system EC-2 of 750 micron.
The colour coat shall be as per Transnet specification.

PSL 3.3.3 Pipe Identification
The painting (stencilling) of the following markings (50mm lettering) to equipment and pipes shall be
included in the tendered rates for piping.
a) Direction of flow arrows with self-adhesive stickers or lacqued paint also indication applicable
colour coding.
Fluid flow direction on the pipe has an isosceles triangle shape (base: 50 mm, height: 150 mm) and
has the conventional fluid colour for colours as indicated in the table and should be on a white
background.
Identification mark and flow direction are indicated every ten meters, and also at the entrance or the
exit of each obstacle (pass through walls and gutters, pass through the ground (in and out))
Note that the repairs to any existing painted structures shall be done in accordance with the original
painting specifications for that item.
PSL 3.4 Bolts and Nuts
Stud studs bolts and nuts shall conform to ANSI B16.5 and be suitable for #150 (and #300 where
required) raised face flanges. (A193 B8M studs with A194 Gr 8 nuts).
PSL 4 Gaskets
Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, gaskets shall be of non-asbestos fibre complying with the
requirements of BS 7531. Only approved brands, including Permanite style 229, Klinger Topgraph
2000 and Klinger Oilit may be used.
Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, all gasket material shall be 1.5mm thick flat to BS 3063 or
ANSIB16.21.
All gaskets for raised face flanges should be self centering and dimensioned to ANSI B16.21.
All gaskets shall be purpose made. Hand cutting and trimming of gaskets on site will not be
acceptable.
Care shall be taken to ensure that all gaskets are packed properly and are not damaged by bending.
For larger sizes the gasket shall be suitably supported by wooden frames during transit and while in
store.
PSL 6 Welding Procedures
Prior to the commencement of any welding, welding procedures shall be established and approved by
the Engineer and thereafter such welding procedure shall be adhered to during subsequent
construction and shall not be altered unless specifically authorised by the Engineer.
The contractor shall provide a detailed description of all aspects of the welding technique to be
employed both in jointing pipes in assemblies above trench level and in executing in-situ welds
whether above or below ground level. The information required shall include a drawing of the
prepared end for butt welding of flanges and pipes.
Records shall be kept by the Contractor to enable each weld to be subsequently identified with the
welder concerned.

PSL 7 Procedure Qualification Tests
Before the Contractor commences routine field welding the procedures test laid down in API 1104 or
ASME Section IX shall be carried out.
The minimum number of root bead welds, the minimum number of second bead welds, and the type
of clamp used (internal or external) shall be given in the description of the welding technique.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of all welders employed on the works giving particulars of
each individual welder’s qualification tests carried out in terms of API 1104 or ASME IX, the cost of
which shall be borne by the Contractor. Nevertheless the coding of welders for this project shall be
carried out by a recognised independent inspection authority approved by the Engineer and the cost
of such coding shall be for the account of the Contractor.
Before a welder is employed on tack or root welds, he shall carry out a test and root weld on a pipe
of the same materials and under conditions as close as possible to those experienced on the actual
pipeline.
If icicles are present in the bore of the pipes or the weld metal projects more than 5mm the welder
shall not be permitted to undertake tack or root welding. The completed test weld pieces shall be
visually examined and then radiographed. Should the weld appear sound, it shall be subjected to
approved root and face bend tests. Test pieces shall be retained by the Contractor and marked so
that they can be identified with the welding carrying out the test.
PSL 8 Weather
Field welding shall not be performed when the surfaces to be welded are wet or during periods of
high wind unless the operator and the work are properly protected and sheltered in an approved
manner.
PSL 9 Preparation of Joint
Where scarf cutting of the pipe is required in the field the pipe ends shall be prepared by machining
or machine flame cutting. Hand flame cutting shall not be permitted.
When jointing pieces by butt welding the number of tack welds applied shall be kept to a minimum to
be effective in holding the pipe end securely and to maintain the required root gap prior to welding,
but shall be not less than four.
The same procedure for hot cutting is applicable for welding, but where a joint is to be made with
new to existing pipe; it is preferable for safety reasons to flange the joint. In the case where the
flange is jointed to the existing pipe, a rubber expandable plug is inserted into the line far enough
from the heat affected zone. As gas test is then done before a hot work permit is issued. In the case
of the pipe being in a vertical plane, light water may be placed over the plug.
PSL 10 Cutting and Welding Work – where applicable
PSL 10.1 Cold Cutting (pipe cutter or hand sawing)
Before disconnecting or cutting any pipelines, adequate electrical continuity is to be maintained to

prevent sparking due to stray currents in the pipelines. A 50sq.mm (minimum) copper cable should
be used for this purpose and be suitably clamped.
The line must be drained of all seawater after isolation and flushed with fresh water.

PSL 10.2 Critical Tie-Ins Using the “Clay Plug” Method
Where the downtime on a particular pipeline is critical, the Engineer may order the “clay plug”
method to be used to perform the tie-in. The existing lines for the particular line will be drained by
the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer. The Contractor shall then cold cut the existing
lines on either side of the tie-in points and install slip on flanges (unless bolting to an existing flange)
on the existing pipe upstream and downstream of the tie-in point using the “clay plug” method. The
open ends of the cut existing lines shall be “clay plugged. Partially prefabricated tie-in spool pieces
shall then be installed, tack welded, removed, fully welded, pressure tested and reinstalled after
removal of the “clay plugs”.
The Contractor shall allow in his tendered rates for the provision of sufficient cold cutting equipment
and “clay plugs” to work simultaneously on all tie-in points for the line and for all extra costs involved
in performing the above operations.
The use of plumbers plugs as “clay plugs” will be permitted provided that the seal between the plug
and the pipe wall is air tight.
All plugs are to be vented to prevent pressure build up behind the plug. Vents are to end a minimum
of 10m past all hot work and the vent pipe is to be of a non-flammable material in the vicinity of the
welding.
PSL 10.3 Cleanliness during pipe fabrication
Plastic, rubber or wood caps are to be utilised to seal the pipes to ensure cleanliness during all
transport, storage and handling operations, up to placing the pipe prior to welding.
PSL 11 Inspection
Facilities shall be provided for the Engineer and inspection authority so that he may be able to
inspect, during the process of welding, any layer of weld metal. He may require any defective welds
either to be cut out and re-welded or repaired at his discretion.
The Contractor shall clean thoroughly all welds prior to inspection. The Engineer may require a
number of completed joints, selected at random, to be cut for mechanical tests or to be selected for
visual inspection, micro examination or examination by other means. When the Engineer orders the
Contractor in writing to cut out and test joints the Contractor shall be paid for such work at day work
rates.
If as a result of inspection and testing, the work of any welder is found to be unsatisfactory, the
welder will not be permitted to continue under this Contract.
All inspection shall be in accordance with the conformity assessment as defined in SANS 347. The
contractor shall ensure that this is done and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance.
PSL 12 Radiographic Examination
The Contractor will engage the services of an approved radiographer for examination of
approximately 10% of all butt welds in the pipeline. The cost of this testing shall be included in the
rates tendered for piping. For every weld that fails the radiographic test, the Contract shall be debited
with the cost of re-testing the repaired work. Any radiographic testing which the Contractor may
consider necessary in addition to that specified shall be at his own expense. All faults revealed by the
tests shall be repaired to the approval of the Engineer.

PSL 13 Other Non-Destructive Tests
The Contractor will engage the services of an approved non-destructive testing agency for
examination of approximately 10% of all fillet welds in the pipeline by means of dye penetrant or
other suitable tests. The costs involved with this testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
PSL 14 Standards of Acceptability
The completed welds shall comply with the requirements of API 1104 or ASME IX. Work on which
unauthorised repairs have been carried out may be rejected.
PSL 15 Repairs to Minor Faults
Faulty welds shall be rectified in accordance with API 1104 or ASME IX.
All costs relative to the repair of faulty joints, including removal and replacement of the backfill and
making good the wrapping and lining shall be borne by the Contractor.
PSL 16 Tolerances
Tolerances for the line and level of pipelines shall be as follows:
Positions of bends : within 150 mm of the location shown on the

drawings or as agreed with the Engineer,
Level of pipe invert : within 25mm of the level shown on the drawings,
Location of pipe centre in plan : within 25mm of the location shown on the drawings
through the sleeves and culverts and elsewhere
within 75mm of position shown on the drawings or
as agreed by the Engineer.
Line of the Pipe : The line of a straight pipe shall not vary by more
than 15mm from the line of a 12m vertical or
horizontal line.
PSL 17 Testing
PSL 17.1 Protective Coatings and Linings
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour and equipment for conducting the tests as described
above. All tests are to be carried out in the presence of the Engineer at such time and in such manner
as he may direct.
PSL 17.2 Testing of Pipelines
PSL 17.2.1 General
All the pipelines shall be tested as directed by the Engineer. Refer to the line list for test pressures
and applicable codes for each pipe-line.
Blank flanges with necessary air, water and pressure gauge connections shall be provided by the
Contractor for this purpose. Before testing any pipeline all construction work on the pipeline shall be
complete unless otherwise specifically directed by the Engineer.

All joints, including welds, are to be left un-wrapped and exposed for examinations during the air
tests. Vents, drains and relief valves shall be utilised to prevent damage to the piping system due to
expansion of the test fluid during the test period.
The maximum operating pressure of each piece of equipment, including instruments, shall be
checked against the test pressure of the piping system in which the piece of equipment is
incorporated. If the test pressure of the piping system is greater than the maximum operating
pressure of the equipment, the equipment shall be blanked off and tested separately.
Seawater may be used for hydrostatic testing.
Other testing fluids may be used provided they are approved by the Engineer before testing is
started.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary water or other fluid if so specified, labour and equipment for
conducting the tests as described herein. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the
Engineer or his representative at such times and in such manner as he may direct.
PSL 17.2.2 Static Test
The pipeline or equipment shall be filled with water, all scours on the section being opened fully for
one minute or until the water emerges clean. If after 48 hours the Engineer is satisfied that there are
no major leaks, the pressure test shall be carried out.
PSL 17.2.3 Pressure Test
A suitable pump shall be connected to the pipeline at a mutually agreed point.
The pressure in the pipeline under test shall be raised slowly by means of the pump and measured by
a pressure gauge connected to the pipeline. The duration of the test shall be at least 2 hours.
The required test pressure of steel pipelines and fittings shall be as specified in the line list and
applicable line class specification and isometric drawing. In the case of valves, this shall also be the
pressure to be used for gate and body leakage and opening and closing torque tests. Ensure all
valves are open during pressurization.
No section of a pipeline shall be tested against a closed valve.
The Contractor shall be paid under the appropriate item in the Schedule of Quantities for hydraulic
tests. Re-testing after repairs required by this clause shall not be paid for.
PSL 17.3 Testing and Commissioning
PSL 17.3.1 Testing
On completion of hydraulic testing, all new pipelines shall be completely flushed out with clean water
for a period of not less than one minute and at a velocity greater than 3m/s to ensure the removal of
any remaining debris to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

REPORTS
REPORT
For: Line class specification CSL140 for fire water
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0006
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0006_Rev 1 -
LINE CLASS CSL140 Line Class Specification CSL140 Page 1 of 8
© Transnet
Line Class Specification CSL140 Date: 21/08/2017
LINE CLASS SPECIFICATION CSL140
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1. Scope 4
2. Design Conditions 4
3. Construction Notes 5
4. Piping component specifications 6

LINE CLASS CSL140
1. SCOPE
This line class specification is applicable to the Transnet Port of Ngqura liquid berths A100 and B100
fire protection installations.
2. DESIGN CONDITIONS
Line class CSL140 may be used under the following design conditions:
Design pressure: 1920 kPa
Maximum operating pressure 1800 kPa
Test pressure: 2260 kPa
Operating temperature 20˚C
Design temperature 50˚C
Internally lined Polyglass UltraLife PipeCoat, System IL-2 Polyglass VE-series

glass-flake vinyl-ester copolymer, to a DFT of 1000 micron
External coating Polyglass 100 Zipcoat glass-flake polyester copolymer, with

Fluid Potable water
Seawater
Foam Solution (97% Seawater and 3% AFFF)
Piping Standards Testing to NFPA 13 / 24
Design and fabrication to ASME B31.3 Process and Utility Piping
Construction to SANS 1200L

LINE CLASS CSL140
3. CONSTRUCTION NOTES
1. Only fittings listed in the specification shall be used.

2. All pipe to be delivered flanged both ends with protective plastic caps over the
flanges
3. All fit-ups to be carried out on site prior to final welding
4. All piping to be pressure tested prior to coating
5. Pipe-work to be lined inside and out after fabrication.
6. Flange faces shall be coated and sanded down to a flat finish.
7. No raised face flanges to be installed against flat face cast flanges. Flat face pipe
flanges with full face gaskets to be used.
8. Butterfly valves shall only be used for maintenance isolation and not for flow control.
9. Gate valves shall be used when slow opening and closing is required.

LINE CLASS CSL140
4. PIPING COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE RANGE DESCRIPTION NOTES
PIPE
Ø 25 - Ø 50 PIPE, API GR 5L-B, SCH XS, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD ENDS 5
Ø 80 PIPE, API GR 5L-B, SCH STD, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD ENDS
Ø 100 - Ø 150 PIPE, API GR 5L-B, SCH 40, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD ENDS
Ø 200 - Ø 300 PIPE, API GR 5L-B, SCH 20, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD ENDS
45 DEG ELBOWS
Ø 25 - Ø 50 45 DEG ELBOW LR ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 45 DEG ELBOW LR ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
Ø 100 - Ø 150 45 DEG ELBOW LR ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB
90 DEG ELBOWS
EQUAL TEES
Ø 25 - Ø 50 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
Ø 100 - Ø 150 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB
Ø 200 - Ø 300 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB
REDUCING TEES
Ø 50 REDUCING TEE ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 REDUCING TEE ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB

LINE CLASS CSL140
Ø 100 - Ø 150 REDUCING TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB
Ø 200 - Ø 300 REDUCING TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB
CONCETRIC REDUCERS
Ø 50 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
Ø 100 - Ø 150 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB
Ø 200 - Ø 300 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB
ECCENTRIC REDUCERS
Ø 50 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
Ø 100 - Ø 150 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB
Ø 200 - Ø 300 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB
CAPS
Ø 25 - Ø 50 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
Ø 100 - Ø 150 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH 40 STL A234 WPB
Ø 200 - Ø 300 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH 20 STL A234 WPB
WELDOLET
Ø 25 - Ø 50 WELD-O-LET MSS SP-97 SCH XS WT STL A105
FLANGES
Ø 25 - Ø 300 FLANGE TO ASME B16.5 CLASS 150 WELD NECK RAISED FACE A105 6, 7
GASKETS
Ø 25 - Ø 300 RING TYPE GASKETS TO ASME B16.21, 1.5 mm NON-ASBESTOS 7

COMPRESSED FIBRE WITH NITRILE RUBBER BINDER TO BS 7531
Gr. X FIRE SAFE

LINE CLASS CSL140
BOLTS
Ø 25 - Ø 300 A193 B8M CLASS II STUDS WITH A194 Gr 8M NUTS AND SS 316
WASHERS
VALVES
Ø 25 - Ø 50 BALL VALVE, FULL BORE, DIMENSIONS TO ASME B16.10 (SHORT

PATTERN), FLANGED ENDS CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB, INTERNAL
AND EXTERNALLY EPOXY LINED FOR C5 MARINE ENVIRONMENT,
S/S 316L TRIM
Ø 200 - Ø 300 DOUBLE SWING CHECK VALVE CLASS 150 WAFER TYPE TO API 594,
TEST TO API 598, BODY A216 WCB , INTERNALLY AND EXTERNALLY
EPOXY LINED FOR C5 MARINE ENVIRONMENT, ALUMINIUM BRONZE
DISK, S/S 316L TRIM, RESILIENT SEAL
Ø 200 - Ø 300 INDICATING BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGED END CL 150 RF TO ASME 8

B16.10 BODY A216 WCB , INTERNALLY AND EXTERNALLY EPOXY
LINED FOR C5 MARINE ENVIRONMENT, ALUMINIUM BRONZE DISK,
S/S 316L TRIM
Ø 200 - Ø 300 OS&Y GATE VALVE TO ASME B16.34, DIMENSIONS TO ASME B16.10, 9
FLANGED END CL 150 RF, A216 WCB, INTERNALLY AND
EXTERNALLY EPOXY LINED FOR C5 MARINE ENVIRONMENT, S/S
316L TRIM

LINE CLASS CSL140
REPORTS
REPORT
For: Line class specification CS140
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0007
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0007_Rev 1 -
LINE CLASS CS140 Line Class Specification CSL140 Page 1 of 7
© Transnet
Line Class Specification CS140 Date: 21/08/2017
LINE CLASS SPECIFICATION CS140
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1. Scope 4

LINE CLASS CS140
1. SCOPE
Line class CS140 may be used under the following design conditions:
Internally lined None
External coating Polyglass 100 Zipcoat glass-flake polyester copolymer, with

Fluid Diesel
Piping Standards ASME B31.3 Process and Utility Piping
SANS 1200L

LINE CLASS CS140

flanges
3. All fit-ups to be carried out on site prior to final welding
4. All piping to be pressure tested prior to coating
5. Pipe-work to be coated after fabrication.
6. Flange faces shall be coated and sanded down to a flat finish.

LINE CLASS CS140
PIPE
Ø 15 - Ø 50 PIPE, API GR 5L-B, SCH XS, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD ENDS 5
Ø 80 PIPE, API GR 5L-B, SCH STD, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD ENDS
45 DEG ELBOWS
90 DEG ELBOWS
EQUAL TEES
Ø 15 - Ø 50 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
REDUCING TEES
Ø 25 - Ø 50 REDUCING TEE ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 REDUCING TEE ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
CONCETRIC REDUCERS
Ø 25 - Ø 50 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
ECCENTRIC REDUCERS
Ø 25 - Ø 50 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB
Ø 80 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
CAPS
Ø 15 - Ø 50 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH XS STL A234 WPB

LINE CLASS CS140
Ø 80 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH STD STL A234 WPB
WELDOLET
Ø 15 - Ø 50 WELD-O-LET MSS SP-97 SCH XS WT STL A105
FLANGES
Ø 25 - Ø 80 FLANGE TO ASME B16.5 CLASS 150 WELD NECK RAISED FACE A105 6
GASKETS
Ø 25 - Ø 80 RING TYPE GASKETS TO ASME B16.21, 1.5 mm NON-ASBESTOS

Gr. X FIRE SAFE
BOLTS

WASHERS
VALVES

PATTERN), FLANGED ENDS CL 150 RF STL A216 WCB, EXTERNALLY
EPOXY COATED FOR C5 MARINE ENVIRONMENT, S/S 316L TRIM
Ø 15 - Ø 80 FULL SWING CHECK VALVE CLASS 150 FLANGED TYPE TO ASME

B16.34, DIMENSIONS TO ASME B16.10, TEST TO API 598, BODY
A216 WCB , EXTERNALLY EPOXY COATED FOR C5 MARINE
ENVIRONMENT, S/S 316L TRIM, METAL SEAT

LINE CLASS CS140
REPORTS
REPORT
For: Line class specification SS140 for foam concentrate
Fire Protection

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0008
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0008_Rev 1 -
LINE CLASS SS140 Line Class Specification CSL140 Page 1 of 7
© Transnet
Line Class Specification SS140 Date: 21/08/2017
LINE CLASS SPECIFICATION SS140
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE
1. Scope 4

LINE CLASS SS140
1. SCOPE
Line class SS140 may be used under the following design conditions:
Internally lined None
External coating None
Fluid Foam Concentrate (3% AFFF)
Piping Standards NFPA 11
SANS 1200L

LINE CLASS SS140

flanges
3. All fit-ups to be carried out on site prior to final welding.
4. No contact with carbon steel fittings or structures is allowed. Any contact points shall
be insulated between the stainless steel and carbon steel using non-conductive
material.

LINE CLASS SS140
PIPE
Ø 15 - Ø 80 PIPE, ASME B36.19, A312 316L, SCH 40s, SEAMLESS, BUTT WELD
ENDS
45 DEG ELBOWS
Ø 15 - Ø 80 45 DEG ELBOW LR ASME B16.9 SCH 40s A403-WP316-L
90 DEG ELBOWS
Ø 15 - Ø 80 90 DEG ELBOW LR ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403-WP316-L
EQUAL TEES
Ø 15 - Ø 80 EQUAL TEE ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403-WP316-L
REDUCING TEES
Ø 25 - Ø 80 ECC. RED.ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403-WP316-L
CONCETRIC REDUCERS
Ø 25 - Ø 80 CONCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403-WP316-L
ECCENTRIC REDUCERS
Ø 25 - Ø 80 ECCENTRIC REDUCER ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403-WP316-L
CAPS
Ø 15 - Ø 80 END CAP ASME B16.9 SCH 40S A403-WP316-L
WELDOLET
Ø 15 - Ø 25 WELD-O-LET MSS SP-97 SCH 40s A182-F316-L
FLANGES
Ø 25 - Ø 80 FLANGE TO ASME B16.5 CLASS 150 WELD NECK RAISED FACE

A182-F316-L

LINE CLASS SS140
GASKETS
Ø 25 - Ø 80 RING TYPE GASKETS TO ASME B16.21, 1.5 mm NON-ASBESTOS

Gr. X FIRE SAFE
BOLTS

WASHERS
VALVES

PATTERN), FLANGED ENDS CL 150 RF, BODY A351-Gr.CF8M, S/S
316L TRIM
Ø 15 - Ø 80 FULL SWING CHECK VALVE CLASS 150 FLANGED TYPE TO ASME

B16.34, DIMENSIONS TO ASME B16.10, TEST TO API 598, BODY
A351-Gr.CF8M, S/S 316L TRIM, RESILIENT SEAT

LINE CLASS SS140
REPORTS
REPORT
For: Berth B100 Fire Protection Project Specification Portion 1
Fire Protection
Author: Gavin Theron

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0013
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0013_Rev 1 -
Project Specs Portion 1 Berth B100 Fire Protection Project Specification Portion 1 Page 1 of 9
© Transnet
Berth B100 Fire Protection Project Date: 22/08/2017
Specification Portion 1
BERTH B100 FIRE PROTECTION PROJECT SPECIFICATION PORTION 1
A. PROJECT SCOPE
This Project Specification is divided into two portions, of which Portion 1 presents general information
regarding the Works and details various requirements to be fulfilled. The numbering system is
sequentially from PS 1 to PS 6
Portion 1 of the Project Specification is followed by Particular Specifications.
Portion 2 of the Project Specification details amendments and additions to the standardised or particular
specifications and references are given to applicable sub-clauses of the SABS 1200 standardised
specifications or the particular specifications.
B. STATUS
Refer to the Special Conditions of Contract.

Project Specs Portion 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORKS ................................................................................. 5

DESCRIPTION OF SITE AND ACCESS................................................................................. 5
PS 2.1 SITE LOCATION ................................................................................................................ 5
PS 2.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ..................................................................................................... 5
PS 2.3 BATTERY LIMITS ............................................................................................................... 6
PS 2.4 EXCLUSIONS ..................................................................................................................... 6
DETAILS OF CONTRACT ..................................................................................................... 6
CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME .......................................................................................... 7
FEATURES REQUIRING SPECIAL ATTENTION ................................................................... 7
PS 5.1 EXISTING SERVICES AND EXCAVATION .............................................................................. 7
PS 5.2 SAFETY ............................................................................................................................. 8
PS 5.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 8
PS 5.4 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 8
PS 5.5 OTHER ACTIVITIES ON SITE .............................................................................................. 9
PS 5.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT ........................................................................ 9
APPLICABLE STANDARDISED SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................... 9

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
The scope of work is for the construction of firefighting facilities at Ngqura Port for the B100
Berth.
Employer’s objectives are the provision of active fire protection and detection to the bulk liquid
berth Marine Load Arm manifold located on Berth B100.
DESCRIPTION OF SITE AND ACCESS
The area over which the Works are to be constructed lies within the Port of Ngqura.
For entry into the area of the port bounded by the present security fences or relocated security
fences, each person shall be in possession of an identification tag showing a photograph, the
person’s name and unique number. A list shall be handed to the Employer indicating all tags
issued to date which list shall be updated as and when applicable. Persons wishing to enter the
port but whose names do not appear on the list shall be refused entry. All vehicles and
personnel entering the port are liable to be searched, and delays, particularly at peak periods,
must be anticipated. The costs of any such delays are deemed to be included in the tender
prices.
Contractors shall make their own arrangements regarding the necessary permits and all other
requirements pertaining to access through the various check points. Tender prices shall be
deemed to cover all costs involved in complying with the requirements for entry to the site.
PS 2.1 Site location
The site is the Ngqura Port approximately 20km North East of Port Elizabeth.
PS 2.2 Climatic conditions
Temperature
Site maximum and minimum temperatures. Values are sourced from SATCC Code of Practice for the
design of Road Bridges and Culverts.
The design temperatures are:
T_max = +45 °C 1 in 50 year isotherm of maximum shade air temperature at mean sea level
T_min = -4 °C 1 in 50 year isotherm of minimum shade air temperature at mean sea level
T0_max = +35 °C Assumed maximum concrete placing temperature, larger sections require site
measurements
T0_min = +5 °C Assumed minimum concrete placing temperature

Wind
Ref CSIR 2012/0043 assessment at Jahleel Island over period from 1998 to 2011.
Predominant winds are East to East-Southeast, West to South West and Northwest to North-Northwest.
Maximum wind speeds are tabulated below. (Ref ECITO11/EN/RP/020/P5 20 march 2014, table 4.4 and
4.5, p21)
Wind speed exceeded (m/s)
1% 5% 10% 25% 50%
Wind speed, 16.24 12.45 10.33 6.95 3.99
(One minute mean at +21m
MSL)
Frequency of recurrence (years) Wind speed (m/s) one hour mean

1 20.5
5 21.7
10 22.3
50 23.2 (25 recommended)
100 23.9 (40 recommended)
PS 2.3 Battery limits
The works battery limits are the tie-in to the potable water supply to the fire-fighting system and the
pump caisson.
Firefighting and detection works cover the designated area for handling bulk liquid hydrocarbons on
Berth B100.
Specific battery limits are:
 Fire-protection to any other areas on Berth B100 other than the bulk liquids handling area.
 Pipe bridges and conduits are by others; pipe supports for part of the works.
 The electrical supply to the site is by others.
 The pump house and control room construction is by others
PS 2.4 Exclusions
General exclusion are:

 The construction of the marine structures and buildings
 The construction of firefighting for other areas on the site other than those specially mentioned
in this document.
DETAILS OF CONTRACT
This contract comprises, inter alia, the following work :
a) The establishment on site of facilities for the Contractor and the provision of the
necessary plant, personnel and equipment.
b) Construction of various pipe supports, pipe culverts and pipe bridges.
c) Construction of two 10m high concrete foam monitor towers with steel cat ladders and
access platforms.
d) Installation of electrical and data sleeves and manholes.
e) Fabrication, lining and coating of carbon steel piping.
f) Fabrication of stainless steel piping.

g) Installation of free issue fire pump, fire engine, diesel tank, exhaust and associated
piping.
h) Installation of pump caisson and screen net below water.
i) Installation of fire and foam piping and equipment.
j) Motor control / distribution board in the Fire Pump House
k) Small power and lighting in the fire pump house
l) Hydrocarbon gas detection on the jetty
m) Motor control / distribution board in the in the control room
n) Cabling, cable support and terminations for the above
o) Testing and commissioning of the entire fire protection and hydrocarbon detection
system.
p) The removal of plant and equipment, site establishment and the final tidying of the site
upon completion of the Works.
q) The making good of defects in the Works as required by the General Conditions of
Contract.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME
The Tenderer shall submit with his tender a preliminary construction programme showing the
sequence and durations of construction of the main sections of the work. Within two weeks of
the acceptance of his tender, the Contractor shall provide a detailed programme using the same
activity durations and completion date of the programme submitted with the tender and an
estimated cash flow related to the cost and duration of the various items of work.
The critical path shall be clearly defined and the programme shall be drawn up in sufficient detail
so that possible interface problems with the Employer's existing operations and those of other
contractors may be identified and avoided as far as possible.
Progress shall be monitored against the agreed programme. If construction does not in fact take
place in accordance therewith a separate "catch-up" programme shall be provided showing how
the lost time will be made up.
FEATURES REQUIRING SPECIAL ATTENTION
PS 5.1 Existing Services and Excavation
A number of services are known to exist over the whole area of the Works. Prior to commencing
work in any area the Contractor shall consult with the Employer on the location of such services
and shall locate the exact positions and depths of such services by means of radio detection and
hand excavated trial holes. All services discovered by the foregoing investigation shall be
recorded and plotted by the Contractor on a signed sketch which shall be submitted to the
Employer. The Contractor shall assist, when required, in the alterations to such services by
providing labour, plant and material and shall carry out the necessary work as instructed by the
Employer. The cost of excavating any trial holes will be paid for under an item in the Schedule of
Quantities. Any necessary alterations to services will be paid for on a daywork basis.
The above operations shall be continuous and at least two weeks ahead of construction in order
to allow time for the necessary alteration to services or amendments to the design of the works.
Claims for extension of time or for damages in this connection will NOT be entertained if the
operation of locating services is less than two weeks ahead of construction.

Responsibility for protection of all known services shall rest solely with the Contractor and he
shall bear all costs which may arise as a result of any damage which he may cause to such
services or which may arise as a result of his operations.
Notwithstanding the provisions of various payment clauses in the Earthworks sections of SABS
1200, no additional payment will be made for work in the vicinity of existing services as the unit
rates tendered shall be deemed to cover any such additional costs as may be involved.
DUE TO THE PRESENCE OF NUMEROUS SERVICES, ALL EXCAVATION SHALL BE CARRIED OUT
BY HAND, EXCEPT WHERE PROVING TRENCHES HAVE REVEALED THAT THERE ARE NO
SERVICES IN THE AREA.
In the event of water being encountered in excavations, the Contractor shall, to the approval of
the Employer, make arrangements to lower the water table locally or to dewater, and shore, if
required, and all costs in connection herewith shall be included in the rates tendered.
PS 5.2 Safety
The site is a hazardous area and therefore all statutory regulations, as well as those of the
Employer, regarding hot-work, smoking and the use of naked flames in these areas shall apply;
the Contractor's personnel shall be subject to all safety procedures and regulations as laid down
by the Employer.
A work permit must be obtained from the Employer before work is commenced on each and
every day. No welding, grinding or other hot work will be permitted without first obtaining a
“Hot Work Permit” from the Employer. Hot work may be stopped periodically due to the transfer
of flammable products. If noxious or flammable vapours are present, personnel may be asked to
leave the site until safe conditions prevail again.
The Contractor’s site foreman shall keep a day work book for recording all hot work stoppages
and all periods of such stoppages shall be countersigned by the Engineer or his representative.
Claims for standing time will be considered only if this procedure has been followed and if the
Contractor’s employees could not be gainfully employed elsewhere. An extension of time will be
granted if such stoppages delay activities which lie on the critical path.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the satisfactory and safe condition of all power
tools and power equipment. All electrically powered equipment shall be intrinsically safe. The use
of electrically powered equipment shall be subject to the prior approval of the Employer.
PS 5.3 Safety Requirements
These are referred to in the Special Conditions of Contract.
In the event of a fire at the site of the works, the Contractor shall inform port personnel of the
fire and shall then vacate the site immediately. He shall not be responsible for fighting fires
within the port.
The Employer will provide fire extinguishers which shall be placed in positions readily accessible
from areas where hot work is being carried out.
PS 5.4 Security Requirements
Refer to the requirements of the Special Conditions of Contract.

PS 5.5 Other Activities on Site
The Employer’s normal operations and maintenance will continue on the site during the
construction period. It is possible, therefore, that the site and the surrounding areas may
become congested at times, and careful co-ordination is thus essential in order to minimise
disruptions to all parties.
PS 5.6 Occupational Health and Safety Act
All Occupational Health and Safety Act Regulations pertaining to the work being carried out must
be adhered to. The Contractor's employees and Sub-Contractors (including their employees)
shall at all times be supervised according to the requirements of the General Safety Regulations
of the Occupational Health and Safety Act and made aware of his responsibilities. The Employer
reserves the right to judge the competence of the appointed Supervisor for the task being
performed before and during the progress of the work.
APPLICABLE STANDARDISED SPECIFICATIONS
Although not bound in nor issued with this document, the following standardised specifications shall
form part of the contract document and, not withstanding the provisions of Subclause 2.2 of SABS 1200
A, editions specified below shall apply:
SANS 1200 A - 1986 : General

SANS 1200 DA - 1982 : Earthworks (small works)
SANS 1200 DB - 1989 : Earthworks (pipe trenches)
SANS 1200 G - 1982 : Concrete (structural)
SANS 1200 L - 1983 : Medium pressure pipelines
SANS 1200 LB - 1983 : Bedding (pipes)
SANS 1200 C – 1982 : Site clearance
SANS 1200 H1998 : Structural Steelwork
SANS 1200 HA – 1984 : Structural steelwork (small works)
SANS 1200 HC – 1988 : Corrosion protection of structural steelwork
SANS 1200 L – 1983 : Medium pressure pipelines
SABS 0129 – 1977 : Plastic tape wrapping of steel pipelines
SANS 1117 – 1977 : Plastic wrapping for the protection of steel pipelines
SANS 10400 – 1990 : The application of National Building Regulations
Act 84 of 1993 : Occupational Health and Safety Act
Regulations 8 : The Electrical Machinery Regulations
SANS 10089 Part 2 (2003) : The Petroleum Industry Electrical Code
SANS 1535 : Steel tanks for the underground storage of hydrocarbon and
oxygenated solvents and intended for burial horizontally
ASME B31.4 : Code for Pressure Piping B31.4 (latest edition)
API Std 1104 – 1973 : Welding of Pipelines & related facilities
SABS 044 : Welding
SABS 763 – 1998 : Hot dip (galvanised) zinc coatings
SABS 0129 – 1977 : Plastic tape wrapping of steel pipelines
BS2654 – 1973 : Vertical Steel welded storage tanks with butt-welded shells for
the petroleum industry

REPORTS
REPORT
For: Berth B100 Fire Protection Project Specification Portion 2
Fire Protection
Author: Gavin Theron

Owner: Transnet
Revision Number: 1

Document No: 1126901-001-SP-0014
Distribution
Name Title
1126901-001-SP-0014_Rev 1 -
Project Specs Portion 2 Berth B100 Fire Protection Project Specification Portion 2 Page 1 of 57
© Transnet
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PSA GENERAL (SANS 1200 A) ............................................................................................. 6

PSC SITE CLEARANCE (SANS 1200 C) ................................................................................. 7
PSDA EARTHWORKS (SMALL WORKS) (SANS 1200 DA) ....................................................... 8
PSDB EARTHWORKS (PIPE TRENCHES) (SANS 1200 DB) ..................................................... 8
PSG CONCRETE (STRUCTURAL) (SANS 1200 G) ................................................................. 9
PA BUILDING WORK ........................................................................................................ 9
PSH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK (SANS 1200 H) ..................................................................... 11
PSHC CORROSION PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK (SANS 1200 HC)................. 12
SURFACE PREPARATION ......................................................................................................... 12
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 12
MECHANICAL AND HAND CLEANING ....................................................................................... 12
ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING .................................................................................................... 13
HOT DIP GALVANIZING ............................................................................................................ 13
PATCH REPAIRS TO TRANSPORT AND ERECTION DAMAGE ................................................... 13
REGULATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................... 14
SOUTH AFRICAN BUREAU OF STANDARDS CODES OF PRACTICE, SPECIFICATIONS AND
METHODS ................................................................................................................................... 14
INTERNATIONAL ORGANISATION FOR STANDARDISATION ................................................. 14
HOT-DIP GALVANIZERS ASSOCIATION SOUTHERN AFRICA ................................................. 14
PSL MEDIUM PRESSURE PIPELINES (SANS 1200L) ................................................................ 16
PSX ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................... 19
PSX1 SCOPE OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK .................................................................................. 19
PSX1.2 Work Included .......................................................................................................... 19
PSX1.2 Specific Work Scope .................................................................................................. 20
PSX1.3 Supply of Equipment & Material ................................................................................. 20
PSX2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 21
PSX2.1 Applicable Standards and Particular Specifications ....................................................... 21
PSX2.2 Installation Guidelines ............................................................................................... 22
PSX2.3 Commissioning Test Equipment ................................................................................. 22
PSX2.4 Documentation ......................................................................................................... 22
PSX3 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION ............................................................................................ 24
PSX3.1 Electricity Supply ....................................................................................................... 24
PSX3.2 Instruments, Meters, Relays and Ancillary Equipment .................................................. 24
PSX3.3 Motor Control and Distribution ................................................................................... 24
PSX3.4 Instrument, Panel and Junction Box Labels ................................................................. 24
PSX3.5 Notices ..................................................................................................................... 25
PSX3.6 Testing and Commissioning ....................................................................................... 26
PSX4 CABLING ......................................................................................................................... 27

PSX4.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 27

PSX4.2 General Cable Installation Requirements .................................................................... 27
PSX4.3 Service Conditions ..................................................................................................... 27
PSX4.4 Cable Testing ............................................................................................................ 28
PSX4.5 Cable Identification ................................................................................................... 29
PSX4.6 Cable Terminations ................................................................................................... 29
PSX4.7 Cable Routes ............................................................................................................ 30
PSX4.8 Cable Lengths ........................................................................................................... 33
PSX5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION .................................................................. 34
PSX5.1 Electrical Protection Methods ..................................................................................... 34
PSX5.2 Luminaires ................................................................................................................ 34
PSX5.3 Conduit .................................................................................................................... 34
PSX5.4 Ducting .................................................................................................................... 35
PSX5.5 Cable Racking ........................................................................................................... 35
PSX5.6 Junction Box Supports ............................................................................................... 35
PSX5.7 Control Station Supports ............................................................................................ 36
PSX5.8 Emergency Stop Stations ........................................................................................... 36
PSX5.9 Fire Alarm Stations .................................................................................................... 36
PSX5.10 Motor Isolators ...................................................................................................... 36
PSX5.11 Stop/Start Stations ................................................................................................ 36
PSX5.12 Light Switches In Hazardous Areas ......................................................................... 36
PSX5.13 Earthing ................................................................................................................ 37
PSX5.15 Fire Extinguishers .................................................................................................. 37
PSX5.16 Final Positions ....................................................................................................... 37
PSX5.17 Testing, Commissioning and Quality Control Procedures ........................................... 37
PSX5.18 Training ................................................................................................................ 38
PSX5.19 Commissioning Spares ............................................................................................... 38
PSX5.20 Certificate of Completion ........................................................................................ 38
PSX5.21 Schedule of Technical Information .......................................................................... 38
PSX6 STANDBY GENERATOR .................................................................................................... 39
PSX 7 LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS & MCC’S ....................................................................... 41
PSX 7.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................... 41
PSX 7.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................... 41
PSX 7.2.1 LEGISLATION ........................................................................................................ 41
PSX 7.2.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ....................................................................................... 41
PSX 7.2.3 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES .................................................................................. 42
PSX 7.2.4 DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................. 42
PSX 7.2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE & CONTROL ......................................................................... 43
PSX 7.2.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY ................................................................................ 44
PSX 7.3 CHARACTERISTICS....................................................................................................... 44
PSX 7.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 44
PSX 7.3.2 SYSTEM CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 45
PSX 7.3.3 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... 45
PSX 7.3.4 INGRESS PROTECTION .......................................................................................... 46
PSX 7.3.5 CABLE SECURING ARRANGEMENT .......................................................................... 46
PSX 7.3.6 MARSHALLING CUBICLES ....................................................................................... 47
PSX 7.3.7 INTRINSICALLY SAFE CUBICLES ............................................................................. 47
PSX 7.3.8 BUSBARS .............................................................................................................. 48
PSX 7.3.9 EARTHING ............................................................................................................ 48
PSX 7.3.10 WIRING SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 49
PSX 7.3.11 PAINTING ............................................................................................................. 50
PSX 7.3.12 LABELLING ............................................................................................................ 51
PSX 7.4 SWITCHGEAR & ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................... 52

PSX 7.4.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 52

PSX 7.4.2 QUALITY OF MATERIAL ......................................................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.3 MAIN INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER / ISOLATOR .................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.5 INDICATION LAMPS .............................................................................................. 53
PSX 7.4.6 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ............................................................................... 53
PSX 7.5 FREIGHTING ................................................................................................................ 53
PSX 7.6 DATA SHEET/S ............................................................................................................. 54
PSX 7.7 MATERIAL SCHEDULE................................................................................................... 55
PSX 7.8 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST - CHECKLIST ................................................................... 56

PORTION 2 : VARIATIONS TO STANDARDIZED/PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
PSA GENERAL (SANS 1200 A)
PSA 1 Contractual Requirements (Sub-clause 8.3.1 and 8.4.1)
PSA 1.1 Provision of Guarantee
No separate payment is made for costs incurred in connection with the

provision of a guarantee as they are deemed to be included in the tendered
prices.
PSA 1.2 Insurances
Requirements in respect of insurance of the Works are detailed in the

Appendix to Tender.
PSA 2 Toilet Facilities (Sub-clause 8.3.2. (a))
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary toilet facilities at his construction site
and camp area. Suitable chemical type toilet facilities must be provided and maintained.
PSA 3 Water Supply
Water for construction and domestic purposes at the site will be made available at normal
tariff rates by the Employer. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs incurred in
respect of the necessary connections, distribution, metering equipment and making good
afterwards.
Where hydrants charged with municipal water are available within the site, these will be
pointed out to the Contractor and water may be drawn from these. The Contractor shall
supply his own connections and hoses and other methods of distribution. Under no
circumstances will the use of the Employer's hoses be permitted.
PSA 4 Electrical Power Supply
Power at the Contractor's camp area and on site will not be provided. The Contractor shall
make his own arrangements for his power supply and bear all the costs in connection
therewith.
PSA 5 Camp Areas
Potential camp areas will be pointed out to the tenderers at the site handover. Tenderers
shall allow for all costs associated with their camp including fencing, hardstanding, etc.

PSA 6 QA/QC Data Pack
The Contractor shall provide a Quality Assurance / Quality Control pack which shall include at least the
following (as applicable):
a) Quality Control Plan (QCP)

b) Weld Procedure Specification (WPS)
c) Welder Qualification Certificates (WQC)
d) Material certificates – Pipes, Fittings, Valves, Gauges, Welding consumables etc.
e) Weld maps and NDE/NDT reports
f) Pipe wrapping holiday test results
g) Pressure test certificates (complete with pressure gauge calibration certificates) – pipes, valves,
vessels etc. (including water and sewer pipes)
h) Punch lists
i) Certificates of acceptance
j) Drawings marked up “Record Drawings”
k) Concrete design mix and concrete cube test results
l) Material test certificates and layerworks compaction test results
m) Paint / Galvanising thickness tests
n) Commissioning reports
The above shall be compiled in a hard cover file suitably indexed.
PSA 7 Safety Officer (Sub-clause 8.4.3)
The contractor will provide a full time suitably qualified safety officer/ supervisor for the duration of the
contract in compliance with latest Construction Regulations added to the OHS Act in 2003.
PSA 8 Fire Watch Officer
The Employer shall provide a full time Fire Watch Officer for the duration of the hotwork in contract who
shall be approved by the Municipal Fire Department as being competent in the use of fire extinguishers,
asbestos blankets and fire hoses.
PSC SITE CLEARANCE (SANS 1200 C)
PSC 1 Method of Measurement (Sub-clause 8.2.8)
Notwithstanding the provisions of Sub-clause 8.2.8 of SANS 1200 C, demolition of various

structures will be measured and paid for in accordance with the items in the Schedule of
Quantities. Volumes will be computed according to the net dimensions of the elements to
be demolished with no allowance being made for bulking. Removal off site shall mean
removal to a dump area recognised for such purposes by the Municipality.
PSC 2 Ownership of Demolished Materials
Where items are to be demolished or dismantled and stockpiled on site, the items shall
remain the property of the Employer.

PSDA EARTHWORKS (SMALL WORKS) (SANS 1200 DA)
PSDA 1 Classification (Sub-clause 3.1)
Notwithstanding the provisions of Sub-clause 3.1 of SANS 1200 DA, the unit rate for
excavation shall cover excavation in all materials other than hard rock.
PSDA 2 Excavation
PSDA 2.1 Excavation (Sub-clause 8.3.1 and 8.3.2)
Notwithstanding the provisions of Sub-clause 8.3.1 and 8.3.2 of SANS 1200

DA, no overhaul will be measured for excavation to waste. The Contractor
shall make his own arrangements for the disposal of surplus and waste
materials.
PSDA 3 Existing Services (Sub-clause 8.3.5)
This clause is amended by the requirements of Clause PS 5.1.
PSDB EARTHWORKS (PIPE TRENCHES) (SANS 1200 DB)
PSDB 1 Classification (Sub-clause 3.1)
Notwithstanding the provisions of Sub-clause 3.1 of SANS 1200 DB, the unit rate for
excavation shall cover excavation in all materials other than hard rock.
PSDB 2 Excavation (Sub-clause 8.1.4)
Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-clause 8.1.4 of SANS 1200 DB, no overhaul will be
measured for excavation to waste.
PSDB 3 Existing Services (Sub-clause 8.3.5)
Attention is drawn to PS 5.1 regarding payment for excavations affected by existing services.
PSDB 4 Trench Widths
Where trench excavation widths are specified in the Schedule of Quantities, these are
calculated from the pipe diameters and spacing of pipes as shown on the drawings plus the
side allowance for each of the outer pipes in accordance with SANS 1200 DB 8.2.3.
PSDB 5 Reinstatement of Trenches (Sub-clause 8.3.6)
Workmanship and materials required in the reinstatement of trenches shall comply with the
appropriate requirements of the SANS 1200 specifications.
Reinstatement of concreted areas shall comprise:
a) Backfill and re-compaction of trenches to 95% MOD AASHTO
b) Concrete slab of 30 MPa/19 mm concrete (thickness to match existing). Reinforce

with one layer Mesh Ref. 395, wood float and broom for a non-slip surface.

PSG CONCRETE (STRUCTURAL) (SANS 1200 G)
PSG 1 Cement (Sub-clause 5.5)
The maximum water/cement ratio for all concrete works shall be as per Table 5 of
sub-clause 5.5.1.5 of SANS 1200 G for severe exposure conditions.
PSG 2 Curing (Sub-clause 5.5 8)
No separate rate has been allowed for curing. The contractor is to allow for curing in his
concrete rates.
PA BUILDING WORK
PA 1 Brickwork
PA 1.1 Sand shall comply with SANS 1090 for mortar and shall comply with any tests required by
the
Engineer.
PA 1.2 Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying with SABS 471.
PA 1.3 Cement mortar shall be composed of five parts by volume of sand to one part by volume of
Cement.
PA 1.4 Burnt clay bricks will be good, hard, sound, well burnt bricks of even shape and size and
shall
comply with SABS 277.
PA 1.5 Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with SANS 1024.
PA 1.6 The brickwork shall be built wherever practicable in stretcher bond and joints generally
must not exceed 10 mm in thickness.
PA 1.7 The rate for brickwork must include for all rough cutting, forming reveals, plumbing angles,
Fitting between and wedging and priming against steel frames and must also include wire
ties.
PA 1.8 The rate for faced brickwork must include for keeping this work free from mortar as the
work proceeds and for cleaning down at completion with spirits of salts and water or other
approved cleaning material.
PA 1.9 Generally the prices for building in window and door frames must include for the necessary
bracing and strutting to prevent distortion, building brickwork hard up against frames,
painting all round on both sides and leaving perfectly watertight.
PA 2 Carpentry and Joinery
PA 2.1 Timber must comply with the following SABS Standards:
Softwood structural timber - SABS 563

Softwood brandering and battens - SABS 653
PA 2.2 Gypsum plasterboard for ceilings shall be of gypsum ceiling board 6,4 mm thick complying
with the requirements of SABS 266.
PA 2.3 Brandering to ceilings shall comply with the requirements of SABS 653.

PA 2.4 All frame, ledged and braced doors must be constructed with 44 mm x 114 mm stiles and
head rail and 22 mm x 114 mm ledges, braces and lock rail, filled in flush on one side with
22 mm tongued, grooved and V-jointed both sides vertical boarding in narrow widths
closely cramped up and screwed up.
PA 3 Plastering and Screeds
PA 3.1 Sand shall comply with SANS 1090 for plaster and shall comply with any tests required by
the Engineer.
PA 3.2 Screeds shall be composed of three parts sand and one part Ordinary Portland Cement.
PA 3.3 Cement plaster for internal walls must be composed of four parts sand and one part
cement.
PA 3.4 All plaster must be steel trowelled to a smooth surface or to match existing and must not
be less than 10mm nor more than 20 mm thick.
PA 4 Alterations / Additions
PA 4.1 As far as is practicable, the materials and construction methods used in the alterations
must be similar and equal to the existing work.
PA 4.2 Unless otherwise specified, all old material from the demolition will become the property of
the Contractor and is to be cleared from the site immediately. Any old material specified to
be set aside or stock piled for re-use will remain property of the Employer and shall be
carefully removed, cleaned, stored, protected from the weather and injury and made good
as required.
PA 4.3 The Contractor must carry out the additions with as little mess, noise and disturbance as
possible.
PA 4.4 The Contractor shall not disconnect or disturb any existing services in any way without first
consulting the Employer.
PA 5 Prices
PA 5.1 The prices of all items in this Schedule must, unless otherwise described, include for:
 Protecting the existing and remaining portions of the buildings, structures, finishes
and
Fittings against damage during alterations and demolition work.
 Properly strutting and shoring the various portions of the work with suitable and
Substantial materials to ensure stability and for removing when directed.
 Making good all work disturbed and/or damaged.
 Cleaning away all debris and rubbish from the alterations as it accumulates.
 Making good square jambs and heads of openings cut in walls and casting or
forming lintels over.

PSH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK (SANS 1200 H)
PSH 1 Material
Steel shall be mild steel to SANS 1431 – Grade 350 WA.
PSH 2 Alternative Sections
Alternative sections will be accepted (after consultation with the Engineer), to suit available supplies,
provided there is no loss of strength or stiffness or, where relevant, appearance.
PSH 3 Drawings and Shop Details (Sub-clause 5.1.2)
The Contractor shall provide shop details and shall allow for all costs associated with the provision of
drawings as specified in his tendered rates.
Two prints of all shop drawings shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before fabrication of that
part of the work is commenced. The Employer undertakes to respond to such requests for approval
within two working days.
PSH 4 Welding
All welding shall be fully continuous fillet. Minimum weld size is 6mm. All welding are to be in
accordance with SABS10044 and SANS 455. All welding is to be done prior to hot dip galvanising of
steelwork.
PSH 5 Erection Bolts
All erection bolts used to be manufactured to SANS1700. Bolt Grade 8.8 to be used.
PSH 6 Payment
Notwithstanding the various payment clauses contained in Clause 8.3, payment shall be as stated in the
Schedule of Quantities and shall include for supply, fabrication, corrosion protection, delivery to site,
erection including all fixings and grouting of baseplates.
PSH 7 Connections
As far as practically possible, connections are to be bolted so as to minimise the amount of site welding
required. Bolted connections are to receive a minimum of 2 M20 bolts, unless otherwise specified.
Details of any splices are to be submitted to the Employer for approval prior to erection.
All costs for splice details are for the Contractors account.
PSH 8 Open Mesh Flooring and Frames
Open mesh flooring shall be banded all round its edges and at any cut-outs for pipes etc.

PSHC CORROSION PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK (SANS 1200 HC)
PSHC 1 Structural Steelwork
PSHC 1.1 Surface Preparation (Sub-clause 5.4.3.1)
All surfaces shall be abrasive blast cleaned to Swedish standard SIS 055900 of 1967 to SA ½. The blast
profile shall be between 40 and 75 microns.
PSHC 1.2 Coating System (Sub-clause 5.7)
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Steel components should be designed to be accessible for the purposes of applying, inspecting and
maintaining the protective coating system.
Steel components that are to be hot dip galvanised shall be designed in accordance with the ISO 14713
‘Protection against corrosion of iron and steel structures – Zinc and aluminium coatings – Guidelines’.
Nuts Bolts and Washers
Nuts, bolts and washers for the pipe bridges, supports shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with
SANS 121 (ISO 1461). Electro-plated zinc shall not be accepted as an alternative to hot dip galvanizing.
SURFACE PREPARATION
General
Sharp edges shall be dressed to a radius of not less than 2 mm, but no more than half of the section
thickness. All burrs, rags and weld spatter shall be removed as per the requirements of ISO 12944-3.
Pre-cleaning
Oil and grease shall be removed by high pressure water washing with detergent solution and rinsing with
clean water prior to abrasive blast cleaning and application of coatings.
Chemical and cleaning contamination shall be removed by means of neutralising or flushing or both. It is
important that clean potable water is used for cleaning, or the surfaces will be left contaminated after
washing. The surfaces shall thereafter be allowed to dry completely prior to coating or before continuing
with the rest of the surface preparation process.
Mechanical and Hand Cleaning
Mechanical and hand cleaning shall be in accordance with the procedure specified in Clause 4.4 of SANS
10064 (ISO 8540).
The standard of surface preparation shall be in accordance with ISO 8501/1 and as specified in the
relevant coating system.
Cleaning by means of hand or power-tools, i.e. wire brushes, chipping hammers, scrapers, grinders,
sanders, needle descalers etc. may only be used where specified in the generic coating specification and

the condition of the substrate metal is such that efficient cleaning can be achieved and where the
protective system is designed for application to brushed or ground surfaces, e.g. in the case of surface
tolerant coatings.
Abrasive Blast Cleaning
Abrasive blast cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 4.3 of SANS 10064 (ISO 8504) and
the degree of cleanliness achieved shall be in accordance with ISO 8501/1 as specified in the relevant
coating system.
Hot Dip Galvanizing
Hot dip galvanizing shall be in accordance with the requirements of SANS 121 (ISO 1461).
Galvanized surfaces that are to receive duplex organic coatings shall not be passivated.
All repairs to hot dip galvanizing shall be carried out in strict accordance with the requirements of SANS
121 (ISO 1461). The zinc rich paint used for site repairs to galvanizing shall contain a minimum of 80%
zinc in the dry film in accordance with ISO 12944.
Patch Repairs to Transport and Erection Damage
Handling and installation damage to the galvanized coatings on the pipe supports and bridges shall be
repaired in accordance with SANS 121 (ISO 1461) and as detailed in the relevant CPS specification.
The extent of the damage shall be carefully inspected to assess which coats in the system have been
damaged. Each damaged coat shall be repaired. When the damage extends to the steel substrate, all
coats in the system shall be re-instated.
The patch repair primer used shall be brush applied.
Washing as per 4.3.5 above shall also be carried out between the intermediate and finishing coats as
required.

REGULATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
The following shall form part of this specification and shall be the basis of any contractual agreement
between the employer and the Vendor.
South African Bureau of Standards Codes of Practice, Specifications and Methods
CODES OF PRACTICE
SANS 10064 The preparation of steel surfaces for coating

SANS 121 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles –
(ISO 1461) specification and test methods
International Organisation for Standardisation
ISO 14613 Protection against corrosion of iron and steel structures –

Zinc and aluminium coatings – Guidelines
Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association Southern Africa
HDGASA Code of Practice for Surface Preparation and Application of Organic

01-1990 Coatings.
Design for Hot Dip Galvanizing. Steel Protection by Hot Dip Galvanizing and
Chapter 9
Duplex Coatings
Galvanizing of Structural Steelwork
Environment Atmospheric pressure with Salt Laden air and spray
Material Mild steel
Temperature Ambient
Typical Applications Pipe bridges and pipe supports
System Pipe bridges and pipe supports shall be hot dip galvanized to SANS 121
(ISO 1461)
Notes:
1. The zinc coating thickness shall be as specified for the section thickness.
2. The design and fabrication of the pipe bridges and pipe supports shall be appropriate for
the process of hot dip galvanising.
3. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot dip galvanized.
4. Repairs to transport and erection damage shall be by means of zinc metal spraying or epoxy zinc
rich paint. The zinc rich paint shall contain a minimum of 80% zinc in the dry film and the
thickness shall be 30 micron greater than the specified galvanizing zinc thickness. The damaged
area shall be thoroughly cleaned and the repair coating shall overlap onto the surrounding
sound zinc for a distance of at least 25 mm.
5. The zinc rich paint for repairs will be as recommended by the HDGASA, i.e. either Zincfix or
Zincdek 90 (Speccoats) or Galvpatch (Drivelines and Sprayflow cc).

PSHC 4 Holding Down Bolts, Nuts and Washers
All holding down bolts, nuts and washers shall be at least hot dip galvanised with the threads sufficiently
undercut prism to galvanising. Washers shall be provided with every nut. All sleeves anchors shall be
galvanised. An approved molybdenum disulphide anti-seize compound shall be used on all bolts and
nuts.

PSL MEDIUM PRESSURE PIPELINES (SANS 1200L)
Refer to Specification 1126901-001-SP-0005 “Piping Specification for Fabrication, Erection,

Testing and Inspection” attached.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PSX ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................... 19

PSX1 SCOPE OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK .................................................................................. 19
PSX1.2 Work Included .......................................................................................................... 19
PSX1.2 Specific Work Scope .................................................................................................. 20
PSX1.3 Supply of Equipment & Material ................................................................................. 20
PSX2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 21
PSX2.1 Applicable Standards and Particular Specifications ....................................................... 21
PSX2.2 Installation Guidelines ............................................................................................... 22
PSX2.3 Commissioning Test Equipment ................................................................................. 22
PSX2.4 Documentation ......................................................................................................... 22
PSX3 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION ............................................................................................ 24
PSX3.1 Electricity Supply ....................................................................................................... 24
PSX3.2 Instruments, Meters, Relays and Ancillary Equipment .................................................. 24
PSX3.3 Motor Control and Distribution ................................................................................... 24
PSX3.4 Instrument, Panel and Junction Box Labels ................................................................. 24
PSX3.5 Notices ..................................................................................................................... 25
PSX3.6 Testing and Commissioning ....................................................................................... 26
PSX4 CABLING ......................................................................................................................... 27
PSX4.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 27
PSX4.2 General Cable Installation Requirements .................................................................... 27
PSX4.3 Service Conditions ..................................................................................................... 27
PSX4.4 Cable Testing ............................................................................................................ 28
PSX4.5 Cable Identification ................................................................................................... 29
PSX4.6 Cable Terminations ................................................................................................... 29
PSX4.7 Cable Routes ............................................................................................................ 30
PSX4.8 Cable Lengths ........................................................................................................... 33
PSX5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION .................................................................. 34
PSX5.1 Electrical Protection Methods ..................................................................................... 34
PSX5.2 Luminaires ................................................................................................................ 34
PSX5.3 Conduit .................................................................................................................... 34
PSX5.4 Ducting .................................................................................................................... 35
PSX5.5 Cable Racking ........................................................................................................... 35
PSX5.6 Junction Box Supports ............................................................................................... 35
PSX5.7 Control Station Supports ............................................................................................ 36
PSX5.8 Emergency Stop Stations ........................................................................................... 36
PSX5.9 Fire Alarm Stations .................................................................................................... 36
PSX5.10 Motor Isolators ...................................................................................................... 36
PSX5.11 Stop/Start Stations ................................................................................................ 36
PSX5.12 Light Switches In Hazardous Areas ......................................................................... 36
PSX5.13 Earthing ................................................................................................................ 37
PSX5.15 Fire Extinguishers .................................................................................................. 37
PSX5.16 Final Positions ....................................................................................................... 37
PSX5.17 Testing, Commissioning and Quality Control Procedures ........................................... 37
PSX5.18 Training ................................................................................................................ 38

PSX5.19 Commissioning Spares ............................................................................................... 38

PSX5.20 Certificate of Completion ........................................................................................ 38
PSX5.21 Schedule of Technical Information .......................................................................... 38
PSX6 STANDBY GENERATOR .................................................................................................... 39

PSX ELECTRICAL
PSX1 Scope of the Electrical Work
The Scope of the Contract consists of the work performance relative to the electrical and
instrument installation of the PORT OF NGQURA BERTH B100 FIRE FIGHTING installation up
to the defined Battery Limits.
Drawings and specifications outlining the work to be completed by Contractor are contained
herein.
PSX1.2 Work Included
PSX1.2.1 The Contractor shall provide and do everything necessary to execute the work specified in or
reasonably to be inferred from this specification, the drawings listed in the Drawing Register
hereof and the Contract in its entirety including, but not necessarily limited to the following:-
(a) collection of Equipment from the Client's store(s), loading, transportation to , off-
loading at and receiving of same into Contractor's store, or the receiving of
Equipment at Contractor's store;
(b) the supply, delivery to, off-loading at and handling on Site of all Material as well as
the painting (and touching up) thereof, as applicable, and as required by this
Specification;
(c) the removal from Equipment of all packing materials such as protective mouldings,
transportation supports, stiffeners and struts and the transportation thereof to and
off-loading at a point designated by the Engineer for that purpose;
(d) the checking of all Equipment for conformity to packing lists and for damage and the
reporting to the Engineer of any discrepancies or damage discovered;
(e) the erection of all plant and the modification of existing panels in accordance with
drawings and specifications;
(f) the performance of meggar, continuity and loop checks and performance of all
Electrical Tests as detailed herein, including the provision of all necessary test
apparatus;
(g) the off loading, installation, testing and connection to the various distribution boards
and Motor Control Panels;
(h) the installation of all field junction boxes;
(i) the supply and installation of all cable support conduits and trays/racks;
(j) the timeous supply and supervision of all labour required to complete the Works;
(k) the supervision of and attendance on the installation of electrical sleeves and
trenching in accordance with Clauses PSX4.7.1 hereof;
(l) the provision of site establishment including a "safe" area for material and
equipment;
(m) the supply of Documentation as specified;
(n) the supply of all Construction Equipment necessary for the execution of the Works.

PSX1.2 Specific Work Scope
A new firefighting system is being constructed for the liquid fuels berth B100 at the Port of
Ngqura, Coega. The electrical work included in this project involves but is not completely
limited to the supply, installation and testing of the following:
(a) MCC / fire control panels for both the Control Room and the Fire Pump House
(b) Power distribution from the MCC / control panels to motors and electrical
equipment.
(c) Control cabling to instrumentation.
(d) Small power & lighting in the Fire Pump House
(e) Calibration, setup and commissioning of instrumentation
(f) Cable tray / ladder / baskets;
(g) Certification and sign off of the electrical installation.
PSX1.3 Supply of Equipment & M aterial
PSX1.3.1 Equipment
Equipment to be supplied by the Contractor shall include but may not necessarily be limited
to:-
(a) Motor Control Centre, alarm panels, distribution boards and junction boxes.
(b) Fire Pump House plugs & lights.
(c) Hydrocarbon vapour detectors and stands.
PSX1.3.2 Material
Material to be supplied by the Contractor shall include but may not necessarily be limited
to:-
(a) cables, cable glands, cable trays, "Pratley" type cable junction boxes, conduits,
conduit fittings, cable markers, cable clamps, strapping and trunking;
(b) hot dip galvanised supports/brackets;
(c) crimp connectors, metal and/or plastic tags for cables, conduit, screws, bolts, plate,
angle iron, paint and holding down bolts;
(d) engraved labels as per schedule;
(e) consumables, such as gas, oxygen, grinding wheels, cutting discs, molycote,
graphite, oil, drills, saw blades, brushes, solder, paint, tape, welding rods, etc.,
necessary for the Completion of the Works;
(f) adaptors;
(g) junction boxes;
(h) isolators and Emergency Stop Stations;
(i) terminals;
(j) light fittings.

PSX2 General Specifications
PSX2.1 Applicable Standards and Particular Specifications
Although not bound in nor issued with the document, the following standardised
specifications shall form part of the contract document.
Act 84 of 1993 : Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations

SANS 558 : Cast iron surface boxes and MH and IC covers and frames
SANS 791 : PVC sewer and drain pipes and pipe fittings
SANS 950 : Non-metallic conduit
SANS 966-1 : Components of uPVC pressure pipe system
SANS 1117 : Plastic wrappings for the protection of steel pipelines
SANS 1195 : Busbars
SANS 1200 L : Medium pressure pipelines
SANS 1200 LB : Bedding (pipes)
SANS 1200 LC : Cable ducts
SANS 1473-1 : Low voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies Part 1: Type
tested, partially type tested and specially tested assemblies with a
rated short-circuit withstand strength above 10kA
SANS 1507 : Electric Cables … for Fixed Installations
SANS 1601 : Structured wall pipes and fittings of uPVC for buried drainage &
sewerage systems
SANS 1765 : Low voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies with a rated
short-circuit withstand strength up to and including 10kA
SANS 10044 : Welding
SANS 10086-1 : Installation, inspection and maintenance of equipment used in
explosive atmospheres
SANS 10089-2 : The Petroleum Industry Electrical and other installations in the
distribution and marketing sector
SANS 10108 : The Classification of Hazardous Locations and the selected of
Electrical Apparatus for the use in such locations.
SANS 10129 : Plastic tape wrapping of steel pipelines
SANS 10142-1 : The Wiring of Premises
SANS 10313 : The protection of structures against lightning.
SANS 10400 : The application of National Building Regulations
SANS 60079 : Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas atmosphere
SANS 60439-1 : Low voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies Part 1: Type
tested and partially type tested assemblies.
SANS 60439-2 : Low voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies Part 2:
Particular requirements for busbar trunking systems..
SABS 60529 : Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
SANS 61386-1 : Metallic conduits and fittings

PSX2.2 Installation Guidelines
(a) This code of practice is to be used as a guideline for all electrical, instrument and
control system installation work. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to ensure
that he has read and is aware of the relevant sections of this Code of Practice
before he commences any installation work.
(b) Any work which has been completed by the CONTRACTOR and which does not
meet with the requirements of this Code of Practice, will not be accepted by the
Client. It will be for the CONTRACTOR'S account to rectify the work.
(c) The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all relevant local and statutory requirements
are complied with and that all personnel in his employ are fully conversant with
these requirements.
(d) The CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the Client before power or
pneumatic supplies are switched on.
(e) The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a detailed list of each employee stating his or her
name, I.D. number, qualification and, in addition, ensure that a "Master Installation
Electrician" is permanently on site.
(f) "Master Installation Electrician" means a person who has been registered as a
master installation electrician in terms Occupational Health and Safety Act,
Electrical Installation Regulations and who has been approved by the chief
inspector for the verification and certification of the construction, testing and
inspection of any electrical installation.
PSX2.3 Commissioning Test Equipment
The CONTRACTOR shall provide a list of any special test equipment and/or sub-contractors,
which will be required to commission and maintain the system. The cost of the test
equipment and/or sub-contractors, shall be included by the CONTRACTOR within the
Schedule of Quantities.
PSX2.4 Documentation
PSX2.4.1 General
(a) This section describes the minimum requirements for the documentation to be
supplied by the CONTRACTOR. All documentation shall be in ENGLISH.
(b) For the purposes of the TENDER, the following technical information is to be
provided:
(i) Project schedule depicting procurement, downtime per area and

commissioning duration
(ii) Where standard vendor documentation is supplied, it shall be marked
clearly and unambiguously to represent the actual equipment and system
being supplied.
(c) At the end of the project, the CONTRACTOR will be required to provide the
Engineer, with the following documentation:
(i) Certificate of Compliance, including supplementary sheet, as required.

(ii) All issued drawings marked up ‘As-Built’.
(iii) All schematic and detailed loop diagrams.
(iv) Single line power distribution drawings and all loads shall be itemised

(v) Schedules of all power and signal cables updated to “As Built” status;
(vi) Information on location of equipment;
(vii) Information on the location and depth of underground services and earth
mats
(viii) Information on the distribution and control boards.
(ix) Maintenance Manuals of specified equipment from equipment suppliers.
(x) Test Reports/Certificates.
(xi) Explosion Protected Equipment, Classification Certificates.
(xii) Training and Operational Manuals.
PSX2.4.2 Design & Supply or Turnkey basis
(a) If the CONTRACT has a Design & Supply or Turnkey basis, the following is to be
submitted with the tender in addition to the above
(i) Block diagram of any CONTRACTOR designed infrastructure

(ii) References of installations using the proposed equipment.
(b) After the contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall supply all the necessary
documentation for all equipment supplied to facilitate the installation. The ENGINEER
will control the final documentation issued to the client.
(c) In order to achieve this, the tenderer must provide sufficient detail to permit The
ENGINEER to complete the following:
(i) Block diagrams

(ii) Loop diagrams
(iii) Junction box termination diagrams
(d) In addition, the following documentation including, but not limited to the following must
be provided:
(i) Hazardous rating certification

(ii) Interfacing with other software (communications protocols, etc).
(iii) Maintenance and trouble shooting (diagnostics).
(iv) Certificates of compliance.
(v) Recommended spares list.

PSX3 Electrical Distribution
PSX3.1 Electricity Supply
PSX3.1.1 General
The CONTRACTOR shall complete all commencement forms and necessary documentation
as required by the local electricity supply authority to ensure that the permanent electricity
supply required by THE ENGINEER on site is achieved as soon as possible. All staff
members must attend a compulsory Safety Standards/Work Permit seminar, required by
THE CLIENT prior to any work being carried out on site.
On completion of the work the CONTRACTOR shall supply THE CLIENT with the "Certificate
of Compliance" as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act.
PSX3.1.2 Details of Supply
The supply to the Main DB will be provided by others.
PSX3.2 Instruments, M eters, Relays and Ancillary Equipment
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation of all instrumentation, meters,
relays and ancillary equipment and the glanding of all cables as detailed in the cable
schedule and as defined in Section PSX4 hereof. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall
terminate all cables in the MCC and to intermediate Junction Boxes but shall not terminate
onto any instrument, meter or ancillary device, unless tested and approved by the Engineer.
PSX3.3 M otor Control and Distribution
The CONTRACTOR shall be required to interconnect all components making up the Motor
Control and Distribution centres (MCC/DB’s) as itemised in the Schedule of Quantities.
Where appropriate, schematic diagrams shall be included in the Drawing Register, hereof.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the supply, off-loading, handling, installation and
protection of all free issued main and sub motor control and distribution centres. The
Schedule of Quantities itemises those electrical boards required for pricing. Naturally the
Contractor is to liaise with the supplier of the boards to establish the dimension and weight
of each unit.
MCCs & DBs shall be constructed according to 50000P-PSX-7 LV DB MCC Specification.
PSX3.4 Instrument, Panel and Junction Box Labels
PSX3.4.1 General
(a) The labels shall be manufactured from White laminated Gravoply, Trafolite or
equivalent as approved by THE CLIENT, with Black lettering unless otherwise
stated.
(b) All engraving shall be centred unless otherwise stated.
(c) Engraving width shall be 0,5mm unless otherwise stated.
(d) Labels are to be square with slightly chamfered edges on the engraved side.
(e) The labels shall be 1,5mm thick unless otherwise stated.
(f) Labels shall be secured with two 3mm pan head stainless steel screws and nuts or
else within appropriately sized extruded aluminium rail.
(g) Label size, character height and colour shall be specified by label type unless
otherwise stated.

(h) Wherever practical, the field instrument labels shall be secured in a holder clamped
to the instrument stand with stainless steel "Band-it" strap
PSX3.4.2 Junction Boxes
(a) All junction boxes shall be labelled with labels detailing the area number and
junction box signal type followed by the number as indicated on the Junction Box
Schedule.
e.g. 01-JBX-001
(b) Intrinsically safe junction boxes shall be blue and also be labelled on the inside of
the Junction Box door with a special sticker i.e. "Intrinsically Safe System
Unauthorised modifications prohibited" (MTL type ISL3).
(c) Explosion proof (Ex 'd') junction boxes must not be drilled, consequently these
labels must be mounted on the support frame with two 3mm stainless steel pan
head screws and nuts if the labels were not supplied already fitted to the junction
box.
PSX3.4.3 Panels and Cabinets
The boards shall be in colour coded for each service and shall be clearly labelled in terms of
this Specification. All panels and cabinets shall have a label detailing the panel/cabinet type,
number and, if applicable, the side identification i.e. front or rear.
PSX3.4.4 Additional Instruments and/or Panel Signage
Any Instrument and/or Panel where it is possible to touch the electrical supply of between
50 and 250 volts AC/DC, must be labelled with clearly visible label stating the voltage
present e.g. "CAUTION - 110 VOLTS AC".
PSX3.4.5 Label Schedule
The Electrical Contractor is to study the Cable Schedule and identify the Labels of each piece
of equipment as listed within the Schedule of Quantities, the contractor is to state the
quantity and price of the labels.
PSX3.5 Notices
PSX3.5.1 The following notices shall be supplied and mounted by the Electrical CONTRACTOR
exhibited at all entrances and in suitable places within such premises where generating
plant, transforming, switching or linking apparatus are situated:-
(a) A notice prohibiting unauthorised persons from entering such premises.

(b) A notice prohibiting any unauthorised persons from handling or interfering with
electrical apparatus.
(c) A notice detailing “ DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE”
(d) A notice containing directions for resuscitation of persons suffering from the effects
of electric shock.

PSX3.5.2 Quality and Quantity Of Notices
The signs shall be Type ABS for internal use and Type Chromodec for external use.
Catalogue No. Size Description

KW115 440 x 440mm No unauthorised entry.
KW783 440 x 440mm Danger this equipment starts automatically.
FB2 150 x 150mm Fire extinguishers
KM146 600 x 800mm Composite sign containing the above four statutory
notices.
The quantity of notices will be itemised in the Schedule of Quantities.
PSX3.6 Testing and Commissioning
The CONTRACTOR shall be present when any equipment is tested and commissioned.
This is to ensure that if there are any problems with the connected system, they can be
identified and the appropriate Contractor instructed to rectify the problem.

PSX4 Cabling
PSX4.1 Scope
This specification defines the minimum requirements for low voltage instrument, power,
signal and control cables to be installed as part of the Depot Upgrade Project.
Reference is to be made to the Cable Schedules and Cable Type Codes for specific runs and
applications of cabling in the Contract.
PSX4.2 General Cable Installation Requirements
(a) Where the specification states that the CONTRACTOR shall "cable" or "install
cable/cabling" this involves the following:
(b) A complete study of cable schedule and layout drawings which will show the cable
run to be installed in cable trenches, cable trays, cable ladder rack or supported on
structures.
(c) On site measurements of cable length before cutting off cable drum.
(d) Terminating, glanding, making off.
(e) All cables shall be installed in accordance with the detailed specification, in Section
PSX4 hereof.
(f) All cables shall be installed in one length. No intermediate jointing of cable will be
permitted.
(g) The CONTRACTOR shall take special note that the cable schedules must only be
used as a guide. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining correct
cable lengths.
(h) Unless otherwise specified, screened instrument cables shall have Dekabon or steel
wire armouring and/or screening terminated, with lugs, only at the control panel
end of the cable. Note that thermo-couples terminations are one exception to this
rule.
(i) All wiring shall be neatly installed, and strapped or saddled in position to the panel
or supporting steelwork. All strapping on horizontal supports shall be by means of
proprietary cable straps. In addition, for vertical cable supports metal strapping
(Bandit) or clamps must be installed at least every 1500mm.
(j) Unless otherwise approved by the CLIENT, all conductors shall be terminated by
means of crimped lugs using the correct type and size of lug for the different
terminations. Crimped boot lace ferrules are required for smaller wires.
(k) All cables to be labelled on either end as per PSX4.5
(l) It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to ensure that all dies and crimping
tools, are the correct sizes.
(m) Conductors shall not be carried over or formed around sharp edges or corners.
PSX4.3 Service Conditions
PSX4.3.1 Definition of Cable Locations
Protected Environment: Indoors, for example within the office block, MCC or other
buildings
Overhead: Cable mounted and supported on cable trays or alternative
mechanical support.
Underground: Cable to be directly buried in ground/trench or taken through
ducts or sleeves.

PSX4.3.2 Instrument Cable Specifications
(a) Signal Cables
(i) Conductor 1,0mm² of flexible stranded twisted tinned copper wire and PVC
insulated for at least 250 volts.
(ii) Insulated conductor pairs to be twisted at a rate of about 10 twists per metre.
(iii) For multicore cables the twisted pairs to be twisted in layers at rate normally
supplied by cable manufacturer.
(iv) Overall tinned copper wire braided screen or aluminium tape screen with drain
wire.
(v) PVC sheath over screen.
(vi) Aluminium tape (Dekabon preferred) or steel wire armouring.
(vii) Overall PVC sheath.
(viii) Maximum L/R ratio 40 uH/Ohm and maximum C 200 pf/metre between cores
and 400 pf/metre between any cores and screen.
(b) Cable Colours
(i) Normal signal cables - outer sheath to be black.

(ii) Intrinsically safe signal cables - outer sheath to be light blue or else the ends
sleeved with blue heat shrink tubing.
(iii) Cable cores to be marked, although colour coding of cable cores can be applied
and the actual colour code will be mutually agreed before cables are ordered.
PSX4.4 Cable Testing
PSX4.4.1 General
(a) Immediately after cables are laid and before connection, all cables shall be checked
for polarity, continuity and insulation resistance using proper test equipment. The
CONTRACTOR shall furnish the Engineer with test certificates for ALL cables.
(b) Underground cables shall be tested before backfilling commences.
(c) The CONTRACTOR shall check the electrical supply to ensure that the correct
supply, AC or DC, and the correct voltage is being fed to the instrument before it is
commissioned.
(d) Special attention shall be given to testing the shielding of cables and wires to
ensure continuity of such screening and earth.
(e) Reference is to be made to the Section PSX4.3 hereof for specific requirements for
cable testing.
(f) For each cable drum the manufacturer must complete a “CABLE TEST
CERTIFICATE”.
PSX4.4.2 Test Cables (Instrument Cables)
Use a 100V D.C. Megger to measure the following cable insulation resistance and continuity
parameters:-
(a) For each pair: conductor to conductor greater than 90M ohm.
(b) For each pair: conductor to screen greater than 60M ohm.
(c) Individual screen to overall screen greater than 10M ohm.
(d) Overall screen to armour/protective sheath greater than 10M ohm.
(e) Continuity of all conductors, screen and armouring (Dekabon or SWA)
All values to be recorded on Cable Test Certificates. (Refer Appendix PSX – B Cable Test
Certificate)

PSX4.4.3 Thermocouple cables must not be Meggered for continuity. The continuity and insulation is
to be tested using a suitable method that will not damage the cable insulation. Details of
the test method used are to accompany the cable test certificate.
PSX4.4.4 Test Details (Power and Control Cables)
Use a 500V D.C. Megger for 600/1000V cables and a 2500V DC Megger for 6kV/11kV cables
to measure the following cable parameters:-
(a) Phase - phase - greater than 90 Mohm

(b) Phase - neutral - greater than 90 Mohm
(c) Phase - earth and/or armouring - greater than 90 Mohm
(d) Neutral to earth - greater than 90 Mohm
In addition, check for continuity of every conductor. All values to be recorded on the Cable
Test Certificates. (Refer Appendix PSX – B Cable Test Certificate)
PSX4.5 Cable Identification
(a) It will be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to correctly identify the cable type
required on the cable schedule before installation. Cross referencing shall be done
to verify the following parameters: number and colour of cores/pairs, core/pair
strand details, screen wires, armouring, (SWA or DEKABON) and cable outer sheath
colour.
(b) Reference is to be made to the Cable Schedule column 1 “Cable No.” which will be
used to reference all cables (14/18).
(c) Cables shall be identified with the “Cable No.” and the “To” or “From” as on the
cable schedule with stainless steel embossed tags at either end. The appropriate
“To” or “From” will be to permit identification of what the cable is connected to.
Hence at the “From” location the cable will have a tag indicating the “Cable No.”
and the “To” description.
(d) Cables must be identified after completing continuity tests and prior to
commissioning.
(e) SPECIAL NOTE: Payment will only be made for those cables which are identified
and have completed test certificates.
(f) All wire numbers shall be CRITCHLEY or equal approved and of the interlocking,
marking ferrule type and the numbering shall be consistent with that indicated on
the drawings.
(g) All equipment shall be checked to ensure it has been correctly identified and
tagged.
PSX4.6 Cable Terminations
PSX4.6.1 All cable terminations shall be done in accordance with the "Code of Practice for the Wiring
of Premises" SANS 10142-1 and the "Classification of hazardous locations and the selection
of electrical apparatus for use in each locations" SANS 10108 (as amended).
All cables shall be tested in accordance with SANS 1507

PSX4.6.2 As a rule, the following gland types (CCG or equivalent) will be used.
Area
Gland Type Cable Type Location
Classification
CW PVC SWA Outdoor use Neoprene Safe
Shroud)
A2 FLEXIBLE In and Outdoor Safe
(Use Neoprene Shroud)
A2E FLEXIBLE In and Outdoor Ex e
(Use Neoprene Shroud)
E1W PVC SWA Outdoor Ex e
FLP + screw on PVC SWA In and Outdoor Ex d

earth tag (Use Neoprene Shroud)
FLP-TR + screw FLEXIBLE In and Outdoor Ex d
on earth tag (Use Neoprene Shroud)
FLP Hose FLEXIBLE + Outer Sheath Outdoors Ex d

(ie SPRAGUE tubing)
POSISEAL PVC SWA Corrosive Environment Ex e
IP68
POSIGRIP FLEXIBLE Corrosive Environment Ex e
IP68
NOTE: Where other types of glands and cables are required, the Engineer will advise
accordingly.
PSX4.6.3 On all paired cables, the individual pairs must be sleeved with 6mm black PVC sleeving.
Individual cores on all cables must be lugged with the correct colour coded bootlace ferrule
or spade lugs, depending on the requirements. All lugs are to be double crimped using
approved equipment and must withstand a pull test.
PSX4.6.4 Terminations must be properly tightened and terminated so as not to infringe the safety
classification of the installation.
PSX4.6.5 All cable and wire terminals must be of the screw clamp and pressure plate type where the
clamping screw does not act directly on the conductor; (Type: Phoenix or equal approved).
Specifically “chocolate box” type connectors are not permitted;
PSX4.6.6 Special attention shall be given to testing the shielding of cables and wires to ensure
continuity of such screening and termination to earth. The shields typically must be
connected to the earth system at the feed end only, with the unshielded tails being as short
as possible. The specific detail will be shown on the appropriate termination drawing.
PSX4.6.7 All unused conductors shall be bonded to the nearest earth.
PSX4.6.8 All cables to be tagged with stainless steel embossed tags (allow max 9 characters).
PSX4.7 Cable Routes
The routing of cables is dictated by the sleeve and cable ladder positions. Consequently, the
CONTRACTOR is to liaise with the ENGINEER to ensure that sleeves, cable racks and
manholes are located in the correct positions and that the cables are installed in the correct
positions.

PSX4.7.1 Trenching
(a) Where the CONTRACTOR is responsible for trenching, he must adhere to this detail
specification.
(b) The CONTRACTOR shall take and accept all responsibility for the character of the
ground and an extra over price will be allowed if rock, debris, rubble, boulders,
loose stones, running sand, water, mud, etc, are encountered; at the rates as
specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
(c) Cable trenches are to be closed as follows:
(d) Fill with rock free river sand to a depth of 150mm, if required.
(e) Cover with cable slabs or tiles and danger tape as detailed PSX4.7.5 if HT cables are
laid in the same trench.
(f) Backfill with graded material and make good the surface.
(g) Cable trenches to be marked with approved cable markers every 30 metres and at
every change of direction.
(h) All waste material shall be removed from the site and transported to an approved
tip outside the depot.
PSX4.7.2 Electrical Cable Sleeves
(a) Where the supplying only, installation only or the supply and installation of sleeves
is called for in the project specification, the following requirements shall apply.
(b) The Electrical Contractors shall install draw-wires in all cable sleeves and at least
one draw wire must remain in each sleeve at the completion of the contract.
(c) Sleeves shall be P.A.C. "Kableflex" and nominally 110-mm diameter for power and
signal cables, unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Unless otherwise specified, sleeves shall be laid at a depth of 600mm.
(e) The radius of the bends used in the sleeves shall not be less than six times the
diameter of the sleeve, (twelve times for XLPE cables) and the sleeve not be less
than twice the sum of the cable diameters unless otherwise specified.
(f) The sleeves shall extend at least 1m beyond each side of the road crossings and
shall be effectively sealed at the ends. As a minimum one power and one signal
sleeve shall be provided at each crossing.
(g) Both ends of all sleeved crossings shall be marked by means of cable markers as
elsewhere specified, labelled "Cable Sleeve".
(h) The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements with the CLIENT for
closing sidewalks and/or half the roadway at a time, and he shall comply fully with
any the CLIENT statutory requirement. The surfaces shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the CLIENT Site Engineer, but where tarring or paving has to be laid
or re-laid, this shall not be done until the Engineer has given the necessary
approval.
(i) Where cables cross over or pass under other services, such as water or drainpipes,
they shall be run in sleeves. Where these crossings present a particular hazard to
the cable, the CONTRACTOR shall draw the attention of the Engineer to any such
crossing requiring special attention.
PSX4.7.3 Cable Sleeve Manholes
Where the Electrical CONTRACTOR is responsible for the supply of all material and the
construction of cable sleeve manholes along the various cable routes, reference is to be
made to the applicable detailed construction drawing and quantities specified in the
Schedule of Quantities.

PSX4.7.4 Segregation of Telephone/Instrument/Computer Cables with Electrical Power Cables
(a) Instrument and computer cables may be run adjacently on the same tray, trunking
or conduit.
(b) LV Electrical power cable must be separated from telephone instrument and
computer cables by at least 300mm unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
(c) Where telephone/instrument/computer cables cross-electrical power cables at a
distance less than 0.5m, they should cross at right angles.
(d) Reference is to be made to the method of screening and earthing cables section in
conjunction with the above sub-sections.
PSX4.7.5 Cable Protection Slabs and Warning Tape
(a) Except as may be required for protection between services, concrete protection
slabs shall only be laid over H.T. cables unless otherwise specified. Concrete slabs
shall be at least 230mm wide X 50mm thick, and laid 75mm above each cable on a
bed of sand or sifted selected backfill (100mm deep compacted).
(b) Plastic warning tape is required above all cables. The tape(s) shall cover the full
width of a trench and be laid 300mm above the cable(s).
PSX4.7.6 Markers
Cable route, joint, sleeve, telephone and earth point markers, shall comprise of either:-
(a) concrete blocks in the shape of truncated pyramids 300mm high, 225mm x 225mm
at the base and150mm at the top;
(b) formed blocks 15mm above a new concrete slab.
In each case, the top shall have a 80mm x 80mm x 10mm deep recess into which a 3 - 4
mm stainless steel (316) plate containing lettering and direction arrows shall be grouted.
The lettering and direction arrows shall be engraved 10mm high x 5mm wide x 1mm deep,
into the stainless steel plate prior to installation.
The lettering and direction indication shall be:-
For Power, Signal and Data Cable route markers, as applicable

Power Signal Data
Cable Cable Cable
  
For cable sleeve, post office and earth point marker, as applicable
Cable Telkom Earth Earth
Sleeve Spike Mat
The markers shall be buried in the ground or built in concrete slabs directly over the cable
route, joint, sleeve end or earth point, with the top protruding 15mm above the finished
ground level except where they may cause obstruction, in which case the top shall be flush
with the finished ground level.
Route markers shall be placed at every change of direction and at 30m intervals along
straight runs.
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the ground under and around each marker is properly
compacted.

PSX4.8 Cable Lengths
All scheduled cable lengths are for tendering purposes only and the CONTRACTOR shall
measure the actual lengths required before ordering. In such cases cables lengths will be
re-measured after installation and the lengths indicated in the schedule will be adjusted
accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be paid for the actual lengths measured on site and any
allowance for snaking, joints or ends must be incorporated in the unit price.
Final documentation shall include “as built” cable schedules inclusive of actual lengths.

PSX5 Electrical Equipment and Installation
PSX5.1 Electrical Protection Methods
It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S sole responsibility to ensure that their entire system
installation is in accordance with the codes and standards as listed in Section
PSX2.1 . All certified equipment used must be certified by the SABS or by a SANAS approval
body in addition to any ATEX or Cenelec approval.
THIS I.A. CERTIFICATION MUST BE OBTAINED WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS PURCHASED
OTHERWISE THE EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE CERTIFIED. ANY DEVIATION FROM THIS WILL
BE FOR THE CONTRACTORS SOLE COST.
PSX5.2 Luminaires
The luminaries, as specified in the Schedule of Quantities, must be supplied complete with
electronic ballasts, lamps and fixing material, as required.
PSX5.2.1 Existing Installations
At the site visit, the Contractor is to identify and familiarise himself with each of the above
mentioned areas and quote a lump sum price for:
(a) electrical isolation;

(b) dismantling of all electrical equipment including but not limited to lighting, switches,
control boxes, junction boxes, etc.
(c) removal of cabling between each facility and the source of supply unless this activity
requires trenching and the breaking of concrete.
PSX5.2.2 Typical Installations
New Luminaire types will be installed by the Contractor within the site, operational areas, as
quantified in the Schedule of Quantities and shown on the drawings
PSX5.3 Conduit
(a) All conduit shall carry the SABS mark of quality and approval.
(b) Galvanised and painted, “Bosal" conduit shall be used to support individual cables
on all vertical and horizontal straight runs within the SITE.
(c) SABS approval, PVC conduit may be used within the office and general buildings and
where conduit is buried or cast in concrete.
(d) Above ground conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanised steel except final connections
to thermocouple heads and solenoids, which shall be flexible.
(e) All conduit runs shall be installed with a minimum number of bends and offsets.
Generally a run of conduit containing low voltage wire shall have a maximum pulling
distance of 30 metres and contain not more than 3½ quarter bends, (315 degrees
total) including offsets and bends located immediately adjacent to the pull location.
On runs over 30 metres, this shall be reduced to 2 quarter bends (180 degrees
total).
(f) Where bends or offsets are required, they shall be made with suitable conduit
bending equipment. Uniform circular cross-section of the conduit shall be
maintained at such bends. No single bend shall be greater than 90 degrees.
(g) Couplings or other fittings shall not be installed in the curved portion of bends.
Where unions are required because of bends they shall be installed at least one joint
from the bend.

(h) Pull fittings, including 90-degree elbow fittings, shall have cast covers and shall be
of adequate size so that the cable can be installed without bending it on a radius
less than six times the cable diameter. Exposed threads of fittings shall be painted
after installation to protect against corrosion.
(i) All pull boxes and fittings shall be installed so that covers are easily removed.
(j) Conduits shall be cut square and reamed with a taper reamer. Rigid metallic
conduit joints shall be threaded, cleaned out and made up tightly with a suitable
thread compound. The compound must be a lubricant, which will provide corrosion
protection and permit the joint to be disassembled at a future date. Thread
compound shall not interfere with earthing continuity of conduit system.
(k) All conduit shall be terminated with insulated or brass bushings to prevent damage
to wire during pulling operations, except in enclosures where their design is
adequate to prevent insulation damage.
(l) Conduit seals must be placed in each conduit run in a classified (hazardous) area
entering enclosures. The seal shall be no further than 450mm from the enclosure.
In each conduit run of 50mm or larger conduit, seals shall be placed not only at the
above enclosures, but also at junction boxes and fittings containing terminals,
splices or taps and the seal shall be within 450mm of the box or fitting. When a
conduit run, within the classified area, between two enclosures is 900mm or less in
length, one seal midway between the two could be 450mm or less from either
enclosure, and one seal may serve for both enclosures.
(m) Conduits to be sealed with Green Henley Plastic Compound (GEC/ Alsthom); a fire
resistant putty.
(n) Where the sleeve is large, it is permitted to mechanically seal the sleeve with
polyurethane foam prior to vapour sealing with fire resistant putty.
PSX5.4 Ducting
Within the various areas, it is necessary to install a matrix of power ducting for the supply to
various small power items of equipment.
The Contractor must supply and install power ducting as itemised in the Schedule of
Quantities at various heights along routes as shown. The ducting is to be supplied complete
with hangers and supported at regular intervals as recommended by the manufacturers.
Power ducting shall be supplied complete with bends, elbows, ends, covers and accessories
as required.
PSX5.5 Cable Racking
The Contractor shall supply and install galvanised cable basket, Type O-Line Gridspan or
equivalent approved. "Unistrut" supporting brackets, fixtures and all material associated
with the installation and supporting of the cable ladder, at intervals recommended by the
manufacturer, shall be included.
The cable racking specified in the Schedule of Quantities and as represented on the
appropriate drawings must be read as preliminary and subject to re-routing and subsequent
re-measurement on site.
PSX5.6 Junction Box Supports
All junction box mounting and support brackets are to be manufactured from Unistrut or
equivalent sections where possible. The use of welded channel or angle iron as means of
manufacturing brackets will be limited to special applications only. Junction boxes must be
firmly and rigidly secured to the brackets using the fastening facilities supplied by the
manufacturer, taking care not to invalidate the safety classification of the junction box.

Construction must be such as to allow for the unrestricted bottom entry of cables. To
comply with general specifications, the brackets are not to be secured onto pipes, cladding,
vessels or onto handrails. Junction boxes shall be installed 1.4 meters above grade and in
easily accessible positions. A permit will be required for any work in the hazardous area. It
is advisable to complete as much preparatory work in a safe area as is practical.
PSX5.7 Control Station Supports
All control station supports must comprise a 3mm stainless steel or aluminium backing plate,
predrilled and tapped (or welded nut) with a minimum of two holes per station to which the
control station is fixed with either brass or stainless steel bolts.
The backing plate must be designed for fixing to a Unistrut (P9000) support and must all be
uniform in design for each type of control station. (Refer appropriate subsections for details
of Control Stations).
As the support of each packing plate is dependent on the application the P9000 support
material has been included in the Schedule of Quantities as a total quantity.
PSX5.8 Emergency Stop Stations
Emergency Stop stations shall be as detailed in the SoQ; EEx ‘de’; 55mm mushroom head,
push, lock and twist to release action. The housing shall be a glass fibre reinforced,
polyester resin, IP65 enclosure. Contacts required: 1x N/O and 1x N/C. Provision to be made
for dual cable entry and EEx ‘e’ approved plugs provided for unused openings.
PSX5.9 Fire Alarm Stations
Fire Alarm stations shall be shall be as detailed in the SoQ, EEx de; mushroom, stay-put and
twist-to–release push button action. The housing shall be a glass fibre reinforced, polyester
resin, IP65 enclosure. Contacts required: 1x N/O and 1x N/C. Provision to be made for dual
cable entry and EExe approved plugs provided for unused openings.
PSX5.10 Motor Isolators
Motor isolators (Safety Switches), as detailed in the SoQ shall be STAHL or CEAG, EEx de,
Lockable. The housing shall be a glass fibre reinforced, polyester resin, IP65 enclosure.
Auxiliary status contacts, provision for a Label and a PE terminal are required.
PSX5.11 Stop/Start Stations
Stop / Start stations shall be shall be shall be as detailed in the SoQ, EEx de; Dual Push
Button. The housing shall be a glass fibre reinforced, polyester resin, IP65 enclosure.
Contacts required: 1x N/O and 1x N/C with 1x Green indicator light, 50-250Vac/dc.
PSX5.12 Light Switches In Hazardous Areas
Light Switches, as detailed in the SoQ, shall be, EEx de, non-lockable. Required contacts are
2 x N/O and provision for a label and a PE terminal is also necessary.
Alternatively, a 3 pole motor isolator can be used.

PSX5.13 Earthing
Although provision is made in the Schedule of Quantities for the earth conductors, it must be
brought to the Contractor's attention, the importance of effectively earthing ALL field
equipment, junction boxes, motors, structures etc. Reference is to be made to the specific
earthing drawings and cable schedules.
The Earthing infrastructure shall essentially comprise but not be limited to the following
main areas:
(a) An earth conductor between the Main Distribution Board and a local earth spike. The
bare copper earth conductor is to be bonded to the MCC earth bar and the respective
earth spike as detailed on the earthing layout. Earthing conductors are then
reticulated to Potential Equalising Bars (PEB) at the pump bays and loading/receipt
gantries for the secondary earthing function of equipment and sub-distribution boards.
(b) All Motor Control and Distribution equipment shall be separately bonded to the PEB.
(c) Each motor shall be separately bonded to the respective PEB via an insulated
secondary earth.
(d) The road loading/receipt gantries and the C.O.C gantry have a trench earth bonded to
the structure and to the PEB via copper conductors.
The Electrical Engineer will advise on the appropriate method of Earthing, whether it is:
(a) Lightning protection

(b) Safety earth
(c) High quality earth
PSX5.15 Fire Extinguishers
The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers as per the Schedule of Quantities in the Main
MCC Room. The units and backing signage have been quantified in the Schedule of
Quantities.
Allowance must be made for the supply and fixing of mounting hooks in each case.
PSX5.16 Final Positions
The Vendor shall agree with the Engineer the final positions, routes and methods to be used
with installing all equipment and material.
PSX5.17 Testing, Commissioning and Quality Control Procedures
PSX5.17.1 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)
A FAT will be done on all the DB’s and the MCC prior to arrival on site. The Contractor is to
notify the ENGINEER.
PSX5.17.2 Loop Tests, Quality Control Procedure (QCP)
A comprehensive QCP is to be submitted by the successful tenderer upon award of contract,

for acceptance. Once all checks are made the Instrumentation work will, only then, be ready
for commissioning. The contractor/equipment vendor accepts full responsibility for the
installation and verification of design drawings. Any loss or damage due to incorrect
installation will be for the contractor/vendor’s account.

PSX5.17.3 Wet / Dry Commissioning
Upon completion of the above mentioned QCP the contractor/vendor will then proceed with
hot (Power on) dry (No product) commissioning of the installed instrumentation. Once this is
successfully completed wet (product in line) commissioning can commence. Calibration of
gauges, temperature transmitters and the like will form part of wet commissioning.
PSX5.17.4 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)
Once wet commissioning is completed a SAT will be performed on the system to test
functionality in the field. This test will resemble that of the FAT described and specified in
PSX5.17.1. The SAT will be witnessed by THE ENGINEER and must form part of the formal
handover.
PSX5.17.5 Hand Over
The handover of the system will only be made once the SAT is successfully completed and
all other snag items have been rectified. This will be witnessed by THE ENGINEER.
PSX5.18 Training
The CONTRACTOR shall include in his price, training for up to eight (8) persons from the
end-users, operational and technical personnel to fully familiarise them in the following:-
 Operation of system
 Equipment maintenance and fault finding.
The duration of the course shall be adequate to enable the trainees to take over full on-site
set-up, operation and diagnostics of the system. It is recommended that the training form
part of the site commissioning period on site.
PSX5.19 Commissioning Spares
The Vendor is to ensure sufficient commissioning spares are carried during time of
commissioning. As this is a remote site the delay associated with new equipment failure may
be lengthy and costly.
PSX5.20 Certificate of Completion
(a) Before completion of the contract any damage, which may have been incurred
during the installation, shall be repaired and made good.
(b) A payment certificate will only be issued after completion of all notified defects
(punch list) and once all test certificates called for in the Specification have been
submitted and accepted.
(c) The appropriate Certificate of Compliance as stipulated by the OHSA act shall
acknowledge practical completion of works and the commencement of the period
during which the appropriate contractor will be responsible for any defect.
PSX5.21 Schedule of Technical Information
The Tenderer should ensure that the following technical details have been adequately
addressed and enclosed within the submission.
(i) Data Sheets

(ii) Drawings

(iii) Block Diagram of the Infrastructure

(iv) SABS Approvals
(v) Project Schedule, depicting design, procurement, construction and commissioning
activities
(vi) Alternative Offers
Alternative options may be offered but the Vendor must motivate the preferred option to
suit the Tender Specification.
PSX6 Standby Generator
Not included in this scope.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PSX 7 LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS & MCC’S ....................................................................... 41

PSX 7.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................... 41
PSX 7.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................... 41
PSX 7.2.1 LEGISLATION ........................................................................................................ 41
PSX 7.2.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ....................................................................................... 41
PSX 7.2.3 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES .................................................................................. 42
PSX 7.2.4 DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................. 42
PSX 7.2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE & CONTROL ......................................................................... 43
PSX 7.2.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY ................................................................................ 44
PSX 7.3 CHARACTERISTICS....................................................................................................... 44
PSX 7.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 44
PSX 7.3.2 SYSTEM CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 45
PSX 7.3.3 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... 45
PSX 7.3.4 INGRESS PROTECTION .......................................................................................... 46
PSX 7.3.5 CABLE SECURING ARRANGEMENT .......................................................................... 46
PSX 7.3.6 MARSHALLING CUBICLES ....................................................................................... 47
PSX 7.3.7 INTRINSICALLY SAFE CUBICLES ............................................................................. 47
PSX 7.3.8 BUSBARS .............................................................................................................. 48
PSX 7.3.9 EARTHING ............................................................................................................ 48
PSX 7.3.10 WIRING SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 49
PSX 7.3.11 PAINTING ............................................................................................................. 50
PSX 7.3.12 LABELLING ............................................................................................................ 51
PSX 7.4 SWITCHGEAR & ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 52
PSX 7.4.2 QUALITY OF MATERIAL ......................................................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.3 MAIN INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER / ISOLATOR .................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................................................... 52
PSX 7.4.5 INDICATION LAMPS .............................................................................................. 53
PSX 7.4.6 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ............................................................................... 53
PSX 7.5 FREIGHTING ................................................................................................................ 53
PSX 7.6 DATA SHEET/S ............................................................................................................. 54
PSX 7.7 MATERIAL SCHEDULE................................................................................................... 55
PSX 7.8 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST - CHECKLIST ................................................................... 56

PSX 7 LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS & MCC’S
PSX 7.1 SCOPE
This specification, in accordance with the associated data sheets and drawings, define
the requirements for Low Voltage (LV) Distribution Boards (DB) and Motor Control
Centres (MCC) not exceeding 1000V which include but are not limited to the design,
manufacturing, testing, delivery and installation.
PSX 7.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
PSX 7.2.1 LEGISLATION
Act 85 of 1993 : Occupational Health & Safety Act & Regulations

SANS 10142-1 : The wiring of premises Part 1: Low-voltage installations
PSX 7.2.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
SANS 10142-1 : The wiring of premises Part 1: Low-voltage installations

SANS 1195 : Busbars
SANS 1973-1 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear ASSEMBLIES
Part 1: Type-tested ASSEMBLIES with stated deviations
and a rated short-circuit withstand strength above 10 kA
Part 3: Safety of ASSEMBLIES with a rated prospective
short-circuit current of up to and including 10 kA
Part 8: Safety of minimally tested ASSEMBLIES (MTA)
with a rated short-circuit current above 10 kA and a
rated busbar current of up to and including 1 600 A a.c.
and d.c.
SANS 60439-1 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Part
1: Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
2: Particular requirements for busbar trunking systems
(busways)
3: Particular requirements for low-voltage switchgear
and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in
places where unskilled persons have access for their use
- Distribution boards
4: Particular requirements for assemblies for
construction sites (ACS)
5: Particular requirements for assemblies for power
distribution in public networks
SANS 62208 : Empty enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and control
gear assemblies- General requirements
SANS 61641 : Enclosed low-voltage switchgear and control gear
assemblies - Guide for testing under conditions of arcing

due to internal fault

SANS 60947 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear (Entire Series)
SANS 1274 : Coatings applied by the powder-coating process
SANS 60529 : Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
SANS 1091 : National Colour Standard
PSX 7.2.3 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
(a) This specification is to be used as a guideline for all electrical, instrument and
control system installation work. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to
ensure that he has read and is aware of the relevant sections in this Specification
before he commences any work.
(b) Any work which has been completed by the CONTRACTOR and does not meet
with the requirements of this specification will not be accepted by the Client. It
will be for the CONTRACTOR'S account to rectify the work.
(c) The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all relevant local and statutory requirements
are complied with and that all personnel in his employ are fully conversant with
these requirements.
(d) The CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the Client before any power
supplies are switched on.
(e) The CONTRACTOR shall provide a list of any special test equipment and/or sub-
contractors, which will be required to test, commission and maintain the system.
The cost of the test equipment and/or sub-contractors shall be included and
listed by the CONTRACTOR.
PSX 7.2.4 DOCUMENTATION
The following documentation must be provided as a minimum by the CONTRACTOR. All

documentation shall be in ENGLISH with metric units.
(a) The following documents must be issued to the ENGINEER for acceptance before
the manufacturing process commences:
(i) Drawings, including dimensioned internal and external detailed General

Arrangement (GA) drawings, outline drawings, panel enclosure fabrication
details and wiring diagrams. Note that the internal GA drawings must
include the equipment layouts including but not limited to trunking,
terminals, circuit breakers, contactors, PLC’s, racks, etc.
(ii) Equipment lists including make, model, quantity, part numbers and
maximum and minimum ambient temperature ratings.
(iii) Test certificates for all switchgear, contactors and relays.
(iv) Project schedule depicting approvals, equipment procurement,
manufacturing, testing, delivery, installation, commissioning and handover.
(v) Mass of the panel.
(vi) Heat load calculations with recommended panel ventilation and/or air-
conditioning, if required.
(b) Note that all drawings accepted by the ENGINEER only cover high-level design
and manufacturing concepts. The acceptance does not alleviate the
CONTRACTOR or Panel Manufacturer from complying to this specification and the
relevant SANS standards, as listed.

(c) Once the panel has been manufactured, the following ‘As-Built’ information in
electronic format must be provided. All drawings are to be in DWG format with
documents in both PDF and DOC format.
(i) Drawings, including dimensioned internal and external detailed General

Arrangement (GA) drawings, outline drawings, panel enclosure fabrication
details and wiring diagrams. Note that the internal GA drawings must
include the equipment layouts including but not limited to trunking,
terminals, circuit breakers, contactors, PLC’s, racks, etc.
(ii) Distribution board schedule showing breaker types, locations, phasing, and
main ratings.
(iii) Panel heat load calculations.
(iv) Equipment lists including make, model, quantity, part numbers and
maximum and minimum ambient temperature ratings.
(v) Recommended spare parts list including make, model, part numbers and
supplier with contact telephone number.
(vi) Certification of conformance to SANS 10142 and SANS 1973
(vii) Warranty terms and conditions.
(viii) Maintenance, training and operational manuals.
(ix) Test testing certificates of the panel and all associated equipment including
switchgear, contactors, etc.
(x) Quality Assurance and control test report in accordance with ISO 9000.
PSX 7.2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE & CONTROL
(a) Testing and verification shall be conducted in full accordance with SANS 1973
and SANS 60079 where applicable.
(b) The panel manufacturer or duly authorised inspector shall conduct their own
tests and inspections as listed below and record, in accordance with ISO 9000,
the quality of workmanship in his test reports. A rejection notice is required to
accompany poor quality. These tests are to be carried out before informing the
ENGINEER that the panel is ready for inspection.
(i) Circuits in accordance with the drawings;
(ii) Component ratings;
(iii) Dimensions;
(iv) Metalwork;
(v) Fixings and fasteners;
(vi) Mechanical and electrical interlocks;
(vii) Paint-work;
(viii) Cleanliness;
(ix) Tightness of all fittings, busbar mountings and joints;
(x) Device labels;
(xi) Wiring;

(xii) Compression crimp terminations and ferrule numbering of all wiring at

both ends;
(xiii) Distribution board name and rating.
(xiv) Cable securing arrangement
(c) All distribution boards will undergo a Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) which may
be witnessed by the ENGINEER to ensure compliance with this specification. In
addition, distribution board inspections shall be in accordance with Appendix I of
SANS 1973-1 for distribution boards > 10kA and Appendix E of SANS 1973-3 for
distribution boards ≤ 10kA.
(d) The circuit operation inspections will include electrical function operations of all
circuit breakers, and earth leakage relays, including interlocks and control
circuits.
(e) All information listed under item PSX 7.2.4 (c) must be made available to the
ENGINEER at the time of the FAT.
(f) Should any part of the panel not meet the requirements as stated on the
drawings or in the specification or fail any test, the panel will have to be
corrected and the ENGINEER will have to re-inspect the panel at a later stage.
(g) Note that all additional costs incurred by the ENGINEER due to the panel failing
the first FAT or not meeting specification will be covered by the CONTRACTOR or
Panel Manufacturer.
(h) Once the FAT has been signed off, the panel must be installed on site with all
relevant cables installed and terminated before a Site Acceptance Test (SAT) will
commence to ensure the correct operation of the panel. Similarly, the SAT must
be carried out by the CONTRACTOR to ensure correct operation, before informing
the ENGINEER that the installation is ready for inspection.
(i) All notifications for FAT or SAT tests must be made to the ENGINEER in writing,
five working days prior to the inspection.
PSX 7.2.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
The defects liability period or guarantee and warranty period shall be in accordance with
the main contract. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs to provide equipment during the
warranty period, including return shipping and replacement shipping costs.
PSX 7.3 CHARACTERISTICS

PSX 7.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) Panels rated above 10kA must be manufactured by a SABS approved panel
manufacturer who is registered and duly authorised to conduct routine tests in
terms of SANS 1973-1.
(b) Panels rated up to and including 10kA must be manufactured by a SABS
approved panel manufacturer who is registered and duly authorised to conduct
routine tests in terms of SANS 1973-3.
(c) Input trunking from intrinsic safe circuits from hazardous areas shall be coloured
blue (if required) in accordance with intrinsic safety requirements. All other
trunking shall be coloured grey.

PSX 7.3.2 SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Unless stipulated on the data sheet, the following additional conditions apply:
Voltage Supply Variation - +/- 10%

Frequency Supply Variation - +/- 5%
Maximum Ambient Temperature - 45°C
Minimum Ambient Temperature - - 5°C
Maximum Humidity - 95%
Maximum Altitude - 2500m
PSX 7.3.3 PHYSICAL CONSTRUCTION
(a) Distribution Boards and/or Motor Control Centres may be designed for either
indoor or outdoor installations, inland or coastal conditions. This will be indicated
on the data sheet. All indoor inland panels shall be constructed from a minimum
of 2mm thick mild steel, powder coated. Outdoor inland or indoor coastal panels
shall be constructed from a minimum of 2mm thick 3CR12 Steel, powder coated.
Outdoor coastal panels shall be constructed from a minimum of 2mm thick 316
Stainless Steel, powder coated.
(b) Depending on the Form Factor specified (SANS 60439-1), functional units shall be
located in their own compartments separated from each other and the busbars.
(c) Motor Control & Distribution Centres are preferred to be type tested and
manufactured from standard and interchangeable modules (i.e. "CUBIC" panels,
Siemens “Sivacon” or equivalent approved). This allows flexibility to change
compartments and ensures standardisation where future additions are envisaged.
A preference will be indicated on the data sheet as to whether the panel
construction must be fully welded and powder coated or modular type tested.
(d) All floor-standing units shall be mounted on a plinth to allow easy access for the
bottom entry of cables and/or conduits.
(e) The panel interior must be designed to allow for circuit breakers to be removed
and replaced without disturbing adjacent equipment and without removing the
main bus connectors.
(f) The panel interior must be designed for circuits to be changed without
machining, drilling, or tapping.
(g) Each functional unit compartment and cable compartment must have their own
door and shall be vermin proof.
(h) The panel must be constructed in such a way that no live parts shall be
accessible with the doors open. Access to live parts must require that tools have
to be used.
(i) Screw-in eyebolts, suitable for lifting, must be provided on all distribution boards
with a gross mass greater than or equal to 50kg.
(j) Horizontal and vertical busbars must be provided with bolted on covers.

(k) Each door shall have adequate hinges to carry the equipment mounted on the
door.
(l) Gaskets shall be fitted on all doors and opening panels.
(m) All doors with voltage and current carrying equipment must be earthed.
(n) All normal cabinet access doors shall be fitted with a three point locking
mechanism (refer Cubic system) and the remaining doors (i.e. rear and sides) to
be fitted with square key type locks and hinges, properly secured with a screw to
prevent lateral movement.
(o) Suitable venting and/or air-conditioning arrangements shall be provided to allow

for cooling of any excess heat generated inside the panel, which is above the
ambient. The onus is on the panel manufacturer to determine the heat loading in
the panel and advise whether forced ventilation and/or air-conditioning is
required.
(p) The switchboard shall be designed and manufactured to the degrees of

protection as stipulated on the data sheet and as defined in SANS 60529.
(q) Distribution Boards and Motor Control Centres shall be manufactured in such a
way as to allow for separation of the following sections and as such, each
section, if required, must be a separate compartment:
(i) Incomer Section

(ii) Busbar Section
(iii) Field Cable Termination Section
(iv) Feeder Circuits Section
(v) Motor Drive Sections
(vi) UPS Section
(vii) Control & Instrumentation Section
(viii) Intrinsically Safe Section
PSX 7.3.4 INGRESS PROTECTION
The switchboard shall be designed and manufactured to the following degrees of

protection as defined in SANS 60529.
(a) The minimum degree of protection with doors open shall be IP20. Minimum
degree of protection with doors closed shall be IP44.
(b) The minimum degree of protection between compartments shall be IP31.
PSX 7.3.5 CABLE SECURING ARRANGEMENT
(a) Galvanised gland plates with a minimum thickness of 3mm and a non-corrodible
gasket material must be provided in each cableway or cable termination
compartment.

(b) The main incoming cable must be terminated directly onto the main isolator /
switch. Extension adaptors with covers to prevent accidental touching shall be
provided where the cable core size exceeds the terminal size on the switch.
Supports must be provided to support the incoming cable and alleviate stress on
the main switch terminals.
(c) For cables above 95mm², individual, robust, gland plates with a minimum
thickness of 4mm must be provided.
(d) For single core cables, non-ferrous gland plates shall be provided.
(e) All cables must be supported in such a manner that they exert no force on the
point of termination.
(f) Where stranded conductors are used, these shall be bound together by means of
a UV-resistant nylon cable tie or equivalent, in groups not exceeding 10
conductors at the same potential.
PSX 7.3.6 MARSHALLING CUBICLES
The standards philosophy in all distribution, motor control, standby generator,

uninterruptible power supply, programmable logic controller, etc. cubicles is that no field
wiring must terminate directly onto control/protection equipment.
Consequently a discrete marshalling section for each service is to be provided to meet

the present cabling requirements and allow 20% spare capacity.
Spare capacity implies that wireways, ducting, terminals and equipment supports must be
provided for future use whilst noting the derating of conductors within close proximity.
The marshalling components i.e. terminals, fused terminals, interposing relays, etc. must
be of similar manufacture (i.e. Phoenix Contact / Weidemuller / Schneider).
All components and wiring within the marshalling section shall be clearly
identified/tagged and cross-referenced to the ‘As-Built’ drawings.
PSX 7.3.7 INTRINSICALLY SAFE CUBICLES
An Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) Barrier is a device, which limits the power (energy) which can
be delivered from a safe area into a hazardous area.
To be assured of compliance with an I.S. installation, all equipment used must be

approved by a SANAS registered Hazardous Electrical Equipment Independent Authority
and comply with any equivalent SABS specification.
Suppliers of the equipment specified in the detailed drawings must provide the Panel
Manufacture with the appropriate documentation.
The exterior door of the I.S. cubicle(s) shall be painted blue.

PSX 7.3.8 BUSBARS
(a) Busbars shall be made of solid copper with suitable dimensions in accordance
with SANS 1195 and must be installed in a separate compartment for internal
power wiring distribution.
(b) The Busbars must be constructed to accommodate the temperature rise at the
specified altitude and mechanical strength for the rated fault levels.
Furthermore, they shall be type tested and certification shall be provided from an
approved testing authority stating that the busbar and support arrangement
complete with termination holes will adequately withstand the specified short
circuit current when tested in accordance with SANS 60439-1.
(c) ‘Daisy-chain’ wiring or copper interconnecting devices may only be permitted in

distribution boards where the fault level is below 5kA.
(d) The neutral busbar shall have the same carrying capacity as the phase busbars.
(e) Neutral bars associated with each bank of MCCB’s shall be positioned below each
bank and shall be wired in the same sequence as the MCCB’s.
(f) All busbar terminations/connections shall be made with cadmium-plated high

tensile nuts, washers and bolts. No busbar clamping shall be permitted.
(g) All busbars shall be marked every 500mm and in such a way that they are easily
identifiable. The following colours shall be used:
Phases - Red, White, Blue

Neutral - Black
Earth - Green & Yellow
High Quality Earth - Green
(h) The current density for the busbars and associated droppers shall not exceed
1.6 A/mm²
(i) Spacing of busbars shall be calculated in accordance with SANS 60439-2 but shall
not be less than 50mm. All busbar connections shall be torque tightened to
comply with the manufacturer’s specifications and then a drop of paint placed
between the nut and protruding bolt thread. A record of all torque settings shall
be furnished to the Engineer prior to testing the busbars.
PSX 7.3.9 EARTHING
(a) Internal copper earth bars shall be adequately sized, fixed to the panel
framework and run the full length of the panel, in accordance with SANS 1973.
In addition, an earth bar shall be installed in the field termination compartments.
(b) The earth bar shall be pre-drilled for all equipment shown on the drawings and
specified on the data sheet. Furthermore, 20% spare holes must be provided
and completely equipped with high tensile cadmium-plated nuts, washers and
bolts.

(c) Provision must be made for a connection to the main earth which is typically
95mm².
(d) All compartments, doors, covers plates, gland plates and floors shall be bonded
directly to the main earth bar, by means of a separate conductor.
(e) High Quality Earth Busbars shall be mounted on stub insulators and clearly
identified from the Safety Earth Busbars.
(f) Cabinets shall have an insulated copper earth bar, suitably sized, to
accommodate the connection of instrument cable screens and connections to the
earthing system.
(g) The main body of the enclosure shall have an internal and external M10 earth
boss welded to the surface for either internal or external bonding.
PSX 7.3.10 WIRING SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Power circuit wiring and interconnecting wiring in a switchboard shall be rated to
the full rating of the associated circuit breaker and/or fuse and not to the
equipment.
(b) All wiring must be continuous with no splicing between terminals.
(c) All wire ends are to be crimped and fitted with insulated lugs.
(d) All wire terminals are to be ENTRELEC, PHOENIX CONTACT, WEIDEMULLER or

equivalent and approved spring-loaded type and shall be clearly and permanently
labelled. Furthermore, 20% spare terminals must be provided on the DIN rail.
Stacked or multi-layer terminals are not permitted.
(e) Terminals or terminating conductors associated with one circuit shall have a
protection rating factor of IP 20. Those that are not shall bear a shroud so that
accidental contact is impossible
(f) PHOENIX CONTACT, WEIDEMULLER or equivalent and approved, studded

terminals with eyelet lugs and protective flap are to be used for conductor sizes
above 10mm².
(g) Only two conductors may be permitted per terminal, provided the terminal is
designed for two conductors.
(h) Where wiring protrudes through a metal sheet or barrier, bushings, grommets
and other mechanical protections must be provided.
(i) Panel wiring shall be enclosed within 20% oversized plastic wiring ducts and
provision must be made to route power and particularly variable speed drive
cables within separate wire-ways, to be used for digital, analogue and
communication cabling.
(j) Wiring shall be fire retardant 600/1000V grade PVC insulated wire to SANS 1507.
(k) Direct wiring onto main busbars for voltmeters and/or ammeters shall be a
minimum of 6mm² high rupture wiring with double insulation. Cognisance

however must be made of the stated fault level, conductor size and insulation
rating.
(l) Wiring up to 50V shall be a minimum of 1.0mm² multi stranded 300/500V grade
PVC insulated wire in accordance with SANS 1507.
(m) Where different control voltages are used within the same MCC or DB (i.e. PLC
and UPS circuits), each control system shall be wired using different coloured
insulation.
(n) All inter-panel wiring shall be brought to a common marshalling cubicle at the
top/bottom of each panel and shall be interlinked with the individual motor
control compartments by PVC trunking. A minimum of 50mm shall be maintained
between terminals and trunking.
(o) Separate terminal strips shall be provided in a separate compartment, to

accommodate the outgoing circuits, and/or small power circuits to field
equipment etc. Note the field side marshalling trunking must be twice the
volume of the cabinet side. (Typically leave 200mm minimum space.)
(p) All power distribution wiring shall be labelled on each end with permanently-
embossed, wire markers of the CRITCHLEY or equivalent and approved, slip-on
types and colour coded as follows:
Phases - Red, White, Blue

Neutral - Black
Earth - Green & Yellow
High Quality Earth - Green
(q) All control wiring shall be labelled on each end with permanently-embossed, wire
markers of the CRITCHLEY or equivalent and approved, slip-on types and wired
using a minimum of 1.0mm² multi-stranded wire and colour coded as follows:
Live - Orange
220V AC
Neutral - Black
Live - Yellow
110V AC
Neutral - Black
+ 24V - Pink
24V DC
0V - Grey
PSX 7.3.11 PAINTING
(a) The paint used in all applications shall be lead free and non-toxic.
(b) All holes which have to be drilled and tapped, cut-outs in the metal work, welding
of studs and other steel work shall be completed and smoothed before
commencement of painting.
(c) Mild and stainless steel panels shall be corrosion resistant and prepared and
painted in accordance with SANS 1274 and the manufacturer’s guidelines.

(d) The external colour of the panels shall be:
VOLTAGE COLOUR CODE

400V Light Orange B26
Essential Section Signal Red A11
Instrument & Control Cream C66
Intrinsically Safe Blue -
(e) The panel interior shall be structured with white mounting backplanes.
(f) The board shall be epoxy coated to a minimum of 50 microns. Note: Surface
spray painting of boards by the Panel Manufacturer to change the standard
colour to orange will not be acceptable.
PSX 7.3.12 LABELLING
(a) All labels shall be machine engraved in laminated plastic (Traffolyte) with black
lettering on a white background. Danger signs or warning labels are to have
white lettering on a red background. All lettering is to be in English.
(b) The panel must have a main label showing the following minimum information:
(i) Manufacturer and Year;

(ii) Kantey & Templer logo and drawing number.
(iii) Main label (125mm X 20mm) identifying the panel;
(iv) Size and origin of main supply, adjacent to Main Isolator;
(v) Short circuit rating and duration;
(vi) Busbar continuous rating;
(vii) Rated voltage and frequency;
(viii) Each busbar compartment - ‘Flash’ (No B.3.6 of ISO 3864, Din 4006) and a
label indicating maximum voltage within - i.e. (400V, 50Hz).
(c) The K&T logo to be included on all panels is as follows:
(d) All labels shall be attached to the panel by a stainless steel holder, which will
allow the label to be removed in the future. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.
(e) A legend card, covered in Perspex shall be installed on the inside door of the
distribution boards and all circuits shall be designated on this card.

(f) Internal device labels shall be provided for each piece of equipment and shall be
permanently fixed by a mechanical attachment to the device or a suitable plate,
mounted with the device. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.
(g) All circuit breakers shall be identified in accordance with SANS 60947-1.
PSX 7.4 SWITCHGEAR & ACCESSORIES

PSX 7.4.1 GENERAL
The Panel Manufacturer is at liberty to make alternative suggestions relating to the

conceptual requirements of this specification. However, all alternatives must be
separately priced and qualified in the appropriate section of this document.
All queries relating to the electrical supply and this Specification must be referred to the
ENGINEER.
PSX 7.4.2 QUALITY OF MATERIAL
Note that the Panel Manufacturer must complete the material schedule, attached; as the
adjudication of tenders will be based on the correct design, the quality of material and
quality of workmanship and not necessarily on the cheapest solution.
PSX 7.4.3 MAIN INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER / ISOLATOR
The main incoming isolator of each Panel shall be a four, three or two pole unit, as
indicated on the drawings and shall be complete with door mounted, lockable, rotary
handle.
Suitable glanding room and glanding plates shall be provided for the type, size and
number of incoming cables.
Means shall be provided for locking the switch in the “OFF” position.
The main isolating unit shall be clearly labelled in accordance with the regulations. Where
isolators are used, they shall be rated for 120% full load.
No live parts shall be accessible in the incoming section compartment when the front
cover/door assembly is open.
PSX 7.4.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(a) Circuit Breakers shall comply with requirements for SANS 60947-2 and SANS 556.
(b) All circuit breakers shall be DIN rail mountable and as specified on the drawings.
(c) Cascading will not be permitted unless otherwise specified.
(d) Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have common trip and a single operating handle.
(e) The switching mechanism or handles of all circuit breakers shall be provided with
a suitable means to isolate individual circuit(s) in the ‘OFF’ position by means of a
padlock or other locking device.

PSX 7.4.5 INDICATION LAMPS
(a) Indication lamps shall be Light Emitting Diode (LED) clusters with lens assembly
to provide visible operation.
(b) Lamps shall be replaceable without special tools, from the front of the panel.
(c) Lamp life shall be minimum 50,000 hours.
(d) Lamps shall be colour coded as follows:
Green - Running, On, Energised

Red - Stopped, Off, De-energised
Amber - Alarm, Failure
Blue - Status, Step
Other - As Instructed
PSX 7.4.6 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
(a) Where power factor correction systems are required and as detailed in the
drawings, they must be installed in dedicated enclosures. If there are space
constraints, the Panel Manufacturer must qualify any alternatives to meet the
specification.
(b) Capacitors used for power factor connection purposes shall be sealed type
Nokian; 440V or equivalent approved; complete with discharge resistors.
Inductance coils (typically 5 off turns of each phase conductor) must be installed
between the contactor and capacitors to reduce the change of current (di/dt).
(c) No equipment may contain Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB).
(d) Fuses shall be rated for the capacitor steps and are typically 1.6 to 1.8 times the
full load amp rating of the capacitors.
(e) Fuse failure detection must comprise of a 0.6A Motor Circuit Breaker connected
in parallel with the fuse base. In the event of a blown fuse/capacitor failure the
Breaker would trip on overload, generate a common alarm indication, electrically
prevent the associated contactor from re-energising and provide a voltage free
contact for remote alarm indication.
(f) All contactors and relays are to be rated for AC3 duty.
PSX 7.5 FREIGHTING
(a) The distribution boards shall not be dispatched from the Panel Manufacturer’s
premises until they are complete in all respects.
(b) Equipment that are easily damaged or can be damaged by exposure to a high-
humidity or high-temperature environment must be individually identified and
packaged so that no part is unprotected.
(c) Equipment must be packaged with suitable material as to prevent condensation
during prolonged storage.
(d) Equipment that has been packaged independently from the panel must be re-
assembled on site, by the original Panel Manufacturer or a duly authorised
representative.

PSX 7.6 DATA SHEET/S

GENERAL INFORMATION
Project No. Data Sheet No.
Project Title. Date
Panel Name Drawing No.
SITE CONDITION CONSTRUCTION
Indoor / Outdoor Mild Steel
Coastal / Inland Stainless Steel 316L
Elevation 3CR12 Steel
Location Other
SYSTEM PARAMETERS ENCLOSURE
Voltage (V) Surface Mounted
Flush Mounted
Phases
(Recessed)
Wires Floor Standing
Form Factor (SANS
Frequency (Hz)
60439)
Fault level – 1s (kA) IP Rating (SANS 60529)
Busbar Material Internal Panels
Busbar Continuous
Internal Doors
Rating
Upstream CB Rating External Doors
INCOMING TERMINATION LIMITING DIMENSIONS
Main Switch Type Height (mm)
Rating & Poles Width (mm)
Incoming Cable/s (mm²) Depth (mm)
Entry
Padlockable Door
CABLE ENTRIES & ACCESS LABELS
Top Tag Number
Bottom Panel Name
Other Fed From
Front Access K&T Drawing No.
Rear Access Other
OTHER REQUIREMENTS
Colour
Equipment
Spare Space
Cubicle Fire Suppression
REV DATE BY CHK APP

A 25-Nov-2011 ABC DEF GHI
REV No. A

PSX 7.7 MATERIAL SCHEDULE

Reference is to be made to the Specific Engineering Data Sheets which stipulate the type
of equipment permitted in this Contract. The Tenderer is to stipulate, with the Tender
submission, which equipment has been selected from the preferred list of equipment.
MATERIAL MAKE OR TRADE NAME IS MATERIAL TO

ITEM SPECIFICATION?
1. Circuit breakers.
2. Earth leakage Relays
3. Contactors
4. Relays
5. Overload units
6. Ammeters
7. Voltmeter
8. Indication lamps
9. Selector Switches
10. Push Button Switches
11. Terminals
12. Timers
13. Power Factor Capacitors
14.. Power Factor Controller
15. Emergency Stop Buttons
16. Surge Suppression
17. Interposing Relays
18. Current Transformers
19. Switchboard System
The above equipment and materials offered shall comply with the Specification in all
respects and the Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor, during the course
of the contract, to change any equipment and materials, to meet the above requirement,
without further cost implication.
......................... ……..................................
DATE
......................... ……..................................
SIGNATURE OF TENDERER

PSX 7.8 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST - CHECKLIST

GENERAL INFORMATION
Project Title Project No.
Checked By Date
GENERAL INCOMER
Mass Type
Lifting provisions Fault level (1s)
No drilling or tapping
Voltage
reqd.
CB’s easily replaceable Door interlock handle
Doors open & no live
Aux contacts fitted
parts
All conductors copper Earth leakage
Construction Material Switches
Material thickness Fuses
Gland plates Control transformers
Gaskets Lugs
IP Rating Separate compartment
Powder coating colour Padlockable
Form Factor Warning labels
Ventilation Surge Arrestors
Overall operation Transparent Barriers
BUSBARS EARTHING
Separate compartment Internal Earth Bar
Pre-drilled with 20%
Daisy-chain > 5kA
spare
Neutral bus size Doors & panels earthed
Connections – cadmium Connections – cadmium
plated, high tensile nuts, plated, high tensile nuts,
bolts & washers. bolts & washers.
Int. & Ext. M10 earth
Clamping
boss
Marked & coded FEEDER CIRCUITS
Transparent barriers Separate compartment
Spacing 20% Spare space
Type tested for SC
Cable terminations in
current to SANS 60439-
separate compartment
1
Size & rating UPS Feeder
CIRCUIT BREAKERS IDENTIFICATION & MARKING
MCB’s on DIN Rail Traffolyte labels used
MCCB’s mounted
Warning labels
correctly
Correct CB’s installed Main DB label (125x20)
WIRING K&T logo
Continuous & stranded Manufacturer label
Correct thickness Year of manufacture
Correctly coloured Ampere rating label
Wire markers at both Voltage & frequency
ends label
SC rating & duration
Terminals spring loaded
label
Bolted terminals > Busbar rating label

GENERAL INFORMATION
Project Title Project No.
Checked By Date
10mm²
Terminals crimped,
No. of phases label
lugged
20% Spare terminals Removable labels
One conductor per
SS Label housing
terminal
Wiring in plastic ducts Legend card
Protection where
Components & wiring
protrudes through sheet
identified correctly
metal
DOCUMENTATION
As-built information
Guarantee & Warranty
pack
Equipment test
Installation instructions
certificates
Manufacturer inspection SANS 1973 routine test
record to ISO 9000 certificate

Commissioning Management Plan 1126901-PLN-0009-Rev01
CONTENTS
1. PURPOSE ..................................................................................................................... 4
2. PROJECT BACKGROUND .......................................................................................... 4
3. SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 5
4. STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS................................................................................. 5
5. GOVERNING CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............................. 5
PROJECT SPECIFIC DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................. 6
6. TERMS & DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................... 6
7. SCHEDULE/ESTIMATE ............................................................................................. 7
8. RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................. 7
9. FACILITIES FOR PRE-OPERATIONAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.... 10
10. COMMISSIONING STAGES.................................................................................... 10
CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 10
COLD COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................... 11
HOT COMMISSIONING...................................................................................................... 11
PUNCH & RECTIFY (C1 – C3) COLD COMMISSIONING ...................................................... 12
HOT COMMISSIONING/HANDOVER (C4 – C5) .................................................................. 13
11. SAFETY DURING COMMISSIONING ................................................................... 14
SITE INDUCTION .............................................................................................................. 14
HANDOVER IDENTIFICATION............................................................................................. 14
ENERGISATION ................................................................................................................ 15
ISOLATION & LOCKOUT PROCEDURE ................................................................................ 15
PERMIT TO WORK ............................................................................................................ 15
HOT WORK PERMIT ......................................................................................................... 16
RISK MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 16
TAGGING ......................................................................................................................... 16
12. COMMISSIONING PHASES ................................................................................... 17
C0 – COMMISSIONING - PREPARATION ............................................................................ 17
C1 – COMMISSIONING – CONSTRUCTION TESTING ........................................................... 18
C2 – COMMISSIONING – EQUIPMENT TESTING ................................................................. 18
C3 – COMMISSIONING – SYSTEMS TESTING WITH WATER ................................................ 19
C4 – COMMISSIONING – PROCESS COMMISSIONING (OPERATIONAL TEAM) ...................... 19
C5 – COMMISSIONING – RAMP-UP (OPERATIONAL TEAM) ................................................ 20
13. PUNCH LIST.............................................................................................................. 20
14. TAKE-OVER CERTIFICATES .................................................................................. 21
Transnet Group Capital Page 2 of 28
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE............................................................................................... 21
TAKE-OVER, CARE CERTIFICATE (INSTALL CONTRACTS) ................................................... 22
TAKE-OVER, CARE CERTIFICATE (DESIGN & SUPPLY CONTRACTS).................................... 22
TAKE-OVER, CARE & CONTROL CERTIFICATE (TCC) ........................................................ 22
TOTAL CARE, CUSTODY & CONTROL CERTIFICATE (TCCC) .............................................. 22
15. ANNEXURES ............................................................................................................. 23
ANNEXURE A – COMPLETION CERTIFICATE ....................................................................... 24
ANNEXURE B – TAKE-OVER, CARE CERTIFICATE .............................................................. 25
ANNEXURE C – TAKE-OVER, CARE & CONTROL CERTIFICATE ........................................... 26
ANNEXURE D – TOTAL CARE, CUSTODY & CONTROL CERTIFICATE .................................... 27
ANNEXURE E – COMPLETION/TAKEOVER CERTIFICATE ...................................................... 28

1. PURPOSE
The purpose of this commissioning plan is to outline the procedures associated with
commissioning various types of civils, electrical, firefighting and protection systems and plant
associated with Berth B100. This document shall further describes and defines the procedures to
be followed in commissioning the facilities and systems, which form part of the Berth B100 and
its associated infrastructure at the Port of Nqgura.
The commissioning and start-up of Plant/facilities is a demanding and complex phase of the
project. It involves the combined effort of co-operation and coordination with all parties such as
the construction management team, commissioning team, Clients, Engineering, operational team,
Contractors and Vendors.
The purpose of this Commissioning Management Plan is also to define the terminology to describe
within various stages of commissioning and establish simple procedures and clearly define the
responsibilities of those involved in order to facilitate an efficient handover and/or start-up.
This Commissioning Management Plan shall further be revisited and revised as necessary during
the Project’s lifecycle from time to time and in accordance with the Contractor’s detailed
commissioning plans as applicable for the respective construction work packages.
2. PROJECT BACKGROUND
The Liquid Bulk Terminal in the Port of Port Elizabeth is nearing the end of its lifecycle. This places
a restriction on any development in the Port of Port Elizabeth and there is no room for expansion
of the liquid bulk terminal to cater for increases in future growth in fuel demand. It is furthermore
situated next to residential and recreational areas preventing the development of light commercial
activities as well as residential and recreational areas whilst operational. The benefit of
establishing a new Liquid Bulk Terminal at the Port of Ngqura is that there is ample land for
development that would cater for the increased demand in liquid bulk fuel in the long term. The
Port Development Framework Plan also allows for a future refinery to be constructed in the Coega
IDZ with additional storage tanks and berths on TNPA land.
The benefit of the closure of the Liquid Bulk Terminal in the Port of Port Elizabeth is that valuable
land will become available for other recreational activities, and commercial developments. It will
also allow the development of residential areas in close proximity of the Port of Port Elizabeth on
the southern precinct and surrounding areas.
The strategic decision by the TNPA on shutting down the operations of the Liquid Bulk Terminal
in the Port of Port Elizabeth requires that berth B100 be made available, a second port entrance,
associated services and infrastructure be constructed at the Port of Ngqura by the TNPA as well

as a new Liquid Bulk Terminal. The Liquid Bulk Terminal Operator Oiltanking Grindrod Calulo
(Pty)/Ltd (OTGC) was appointed during December 2016, after following a Section 56 Process in
accordance with the National Ports Act. In future berth B100 will be used for MPT or Dry bulk and
a new berth A100 will be provided under phase 3 of the project. All developments are in
accordance with the Port development framework plan (PDFP).
3. SCOPE
This document defines the inspection, testing and handover process to be followed, when
transferring equipment from construction, to pre-operational testing, to process commissioning
and finally to operations. This applies to all civils, mechanical, structural, electrical,
instrumentation and piping equipment within the Berth B100 project. Where required a detailed
commissioning plan as deemed appropriate at the discretion of the responsible engineer, shall be
prepared as required for the various systems. International best practice norms and standards
shall be followed in terms of inspection, testing for safety, setting and configuring, and rendering
the installed equipment fully functional to its intended purpose.
Items such as concrete and steel structures, earthworks are excluded from the commissioning
scope as these items can be handed over directly from construction to operations, without the
need for pre-operational testing and commissioning. A final inspection and sign-off for these items
will still be required in order to issue the C1 certificate. However, after finalisation of the C1
certificate, control of these items will pass directly to the client, without the need for C2, C3 and
C4 commissioning stages.
OTGC commissioning of the loading arms does not form part of TGC’s scope. OTGC will only
witness the commissioning carried out by TGC and then complete the overall commissioning as
per their scope of work.
4. STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
All aspects of the commissioning process shall adhere to any and/or all relevant requirements of
the following legislation, as appropriate:
 Occupational Health and Safety Act 85 of 1993
 National Environmental Management Act 107 of 1998
 South African National Standards and Codes of Practice
 All local, provincial or S.A. Government laws in force at the time.
5. GOVERNING CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

The commissioning process for all electrical and mechanical equipment shall adhere to any specific
and relevant requirements contained in the following national and international standards, where
different standards call for different testing and commissioning procedures for the same
equipment, the most stringent alternative shall apply.
Note: Where reference is made to a code, standard or specification, the reference shall be taken
to mean the latest edition of the code, standard or specification, including latest Addenda,
supplements and revisions thereto.
The commission process in general, shall be in accordance with the recommendations of:
 The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), and
 The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
 International Standards and Codes – ISO, DIN, BS, ASME, ASCE, ANSI, ASTM, EU
Project Specific Documents

This document should be read in conjunction with the following project document:
1. Project Execution Plan
2. Operational readiness plan
3. Project Schedule
4. Project Specific health and safety documents
6. TERMS & DEFINITIONS

The following terms as defined in the table below shall have the meaning so assigned, unless
indicated otherwise within the text of this document.
Table 1: Terms & Definitions
Term: Definition:
Client For the purposes of this document, the Client is defined as the Employer of the
facilities who will take-over the commissioned Works from the project team.
Contractor The civil, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and piping installation
contractors on site.
Supplier/Vendor Any supplier of equipment, materials or services incorporated into the works to be
commissioned.
Employer, For the purposes of this document, the terms Employer, Project Manager and
Employer Project Contractor as defined in the New Engineering Contract conditions will be called
Manager, Client, project manager and installation contractor.
Installation
Contractor
Process Plant A number of process plant product systems grouped together.

Plant Product A number of process areas which can be operated together independently of the
System rest of the process plant.
Area A group of Systems pertaining to a specific process flow sheet within the process
plant product system.
System A group of sub-systems which collectively are interrelated by process control.
Sub-system A group of civil, mechanical, structural, electrical and instrumentation components
within a system which are related.
Component Individual civil, mechanical, structural, marine, electrical and instrumentation
equipment within a sub-system.
Punch The punch list or defects list is a listing of work items within the scope of the
Lists/Defects List contract, which are outstanding or require completion before the contract works can
be accepted as being completed.
Commissioning Process of assuring that all systems and components of a building or industrial plant
are designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained according to the
operational requirements of the owner or final Client.
Construction Confirmation that the equipment is installed according to drawings, specifications
Completion and operation manuals by means of visual inspection and non-operational checks.
Non-operational checks include adjustments, alignment checks, lubrication and
hydrostatic testing, where applicable, to ready the plant for further commissioning.
Handover A transfer of care, control and custody of a subsystem, system or product system
between successive stages of commissioning.
7. SCHEDULE/ESTIMATE
Allowance has been made on the master schedule and project estimate regarding the
commissioning activities and this can be found on the project schedule and basis of estimate
respectively.
8. RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Project Manager:
The Employer’s appointed project manager.
2. Construction Manager:
An individual appointed by the project manager to:
a. Co-ordinate and direct construction activities and the completion of tasks by the
Contractors.
b. Take-overall accountability of the C1-commissioning-construction phase of the
project.
c. Support the commissioning manager during cold commissioning stage C2 and C3.
3. Commissioning Manager:

An individual appointed by the project manager to:

a. Take-overall accountability of the C2 and C3 commissioning phase of the project.
b. Co-ordinate and interface directly with the construction manager and Clients
commissioning team.
c. Support the construction manager during the C1-commissioning stage and the
Client’s team commissioning managers during hot commissioning stages C4 and
C5.
4. Permit Officer:
The Client will appoint one or more qualified persons as permit officers to be responsible
for the review of the technical aspects of the project commissioning safety permit and
isolation program. The permit officer will have knowledge of the operation of the plant
and of the interactions between the different sections of the plant. The permit officer will
be responsible for:
a. Review of safety permit requests.
b. Directing the placement or removal of safety tags, safety barriers and locking
devices.
c. Maintaining the safety permit log and locking device log.
5. Commissioning Engineer:
An engineer appointed by the project manager to take the overall accountability for the
commissioning of a particular piece of equipment or system during Stages C2 and C3. His
primary responsibilities are:
a. Participate in the final stages of installation
b. Prepare and organize equipment tests and ensure record keeping of these tests
c. Ensure compilation of the handover documents and expedite the approvals thereof
d. Interface with Client’s counterpart(s).
6. Discipline Engineer:
In terms of the commissioning activities, the engineer will be seen to be any of the project
discipline coordinators for civil, structural, mechanical, electrical, control &
instrumentation. His primary responsibilities are:
a. Answer technical queries during the installation stage.
b. Check compliance with designs and equipment specifications.
c. Maintain liaison with the equipment suppliers, transmit technical queries and
organize suppliers commissioning assistance.
d. Initiate and expedite approvals of the contractors check out acceptance certificate,
defects list and take-over certificates.
e. Render assistance in the final stages of construction and installation and
throughout testing and start-up.
f. Identify applicable equipment tests to be done during the commissioning process.
g. Initiate compilation of the contractor’s take-over certificates.

h. The engineer will in most cases also be an integral part of the commissioning team
and thus may double as the EPCM commissioning engineer.
7. Client’s Commissioning Manager:
An individual appointed by the Client to:
a. Communicate all allocated Tippler 3 project commissioning and associated
activities to the Client business units.
b. Liaise with the Client’s commissioning manager to ensure the timeous introduction
of the production team to run the hot commissioning and process stabilization
areas and to optimize and ramp-up the said stabilized process areas.
c. Attend regular scheduled commissioning liaison meetings with all project
stakeholders.
d. Schedule and free up operational staff at the required inception stages for
identified process area optimization and ramp-up.
e. Schedule and train all allocated shift foremen, control room operators and field
operators in optimized and ramped up process areas.
f. Issue final plant hand-over and acceptance certificates to the Port of Saldanha
Terminal project business unit manager.
8. Client’s Area Operations Manager:
An individual appointed by the Client to:
a. Communicate all allocated Tippler 3 project commissioning and associated
activities to the Client business units.
b. Liaise with the Client’s commissioning manager to ensure the timeous introduction
of the production team to run the hot commissioning and process stabilization
areas and to optimize and ramp-up the said stabilized process areas. This liaising
shall include the relevant maintenance manager and personnel for any
maintenance activities required during commissioning.
c. Attend regular scheduled commissioning liaison meetings with all project
stakeholders.
d. Schedule and free up operational staff at the required inception stages for
identified process area optimization and ramp-up.
e. Schedule and train all allocated shift foremen, control room operators and field
operators in optimized and ramped up process areas.
f. Issue final plant hand-over and acceptance certificates to the Port of Saldanha
Terminal project business unit manager.
9. Business Unit Manager:
For the purposes of this document, Business Unit Manager refers to an individual employed
and assigned by the Client to manage a specific business entity within Transnet.
10. Commissioning Team:

A commissioning team will be established consisting of members from the project team as
well as from the Client’s team. The team members will work under the commissioning
manager and Client’s commissioning managers respectively. The commissioning team will
be responsible for the commissioning of a particular system and handover to the
operational team.
11. Vendors & Design Engineers:
The vendors and design engineers who will assist during plant commissioning and start-
up, in specific areas and tasks, may complement the commissioning team.
9. FACILITIES FOR PRE-OPERATIONAL TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING
In general, all mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and piping equipment will undergo some
form of pre-operational testing and commissioning. All civil, structural, earthworks items are
excluded from commissioning and are handed over directly from construction to operations, on
issuing of a signed C1 certificate.
The facilities to be pre-operationally tested include the following
 Electrical system (Distribution Systems, Factory Acceptance Testing of MCC, control

system, 11kV reticulation)
 Mechanical system (Water pumps, and Piping)
10. COMMISSIONING STAGES

The commissioning stages are outlined per functional group in the sections below.
Construction
Stage: C1 Construction Testing

Activity: Equipment inspection and testing
Conditions: Not energized
Example tasks: (Typical) Wiring point to point
Pressure vessel leak check
Pressure testing of associated plant.
Responsible Person: Construction Manager
Responsible Team: Construction management team and construction contractors
Milestones: Construction complete

Completion Certificate approval
Cold Commissioning
Stage: C2 Equipment Testing

Activity: Equipment inspection and testing
Conditions: Energized
Example tasks: (Typical) Motor bump test
Instrument I/O checks to the control system
Responsible Person: Commissioning Manager
Responsible Team: Commissioning team
Milestones: Completion Certificate
Take-Over, Care Certificate approval (TC)
Stage: C3 Systems Testing

Activity: Systems testing
Conditions: Inert materials
Example tasks: (Typical) Interlock checks
Sequence checks
Pump flow checks
Vibration checks
Conveyor alignment
Responsible Team: Commissioning team
Milestones: Completion Certificate
Take-Over, Care Certificate approval (TC)
Hot Commissioning
Stage: C4 Process Commissioning

Activity: Process start-up and testing
Conditions: Process materials
Example tasks: (Typical) Run systems with process materials at relevant capacities required
for commissioning.
Run complete plant
Responsible Team: Commissioning team and Client

Milestones: Take-Over, Care and Control Certificate approval (TCC)
Stage: C5 Ramp-up
Activity: Ramp-up
Conditions: Process materials
Example tasks: (Typical) Increase throughput to design capacity and quality
Responsible Person: Operations Manager
Responsible Team: Client operations team
Milestones: Total Care, Custody & Control Certificate approval (TCCC)
Please note:
The Construction Manager shall be responsible for each section of the plant up to completion of
the C1 commissioning stage. The Commissioning Manager will then assume responsibility for
each section of the plant as it is handed over from construction up to the end of the C3
commissioning stage. The Commissioning Manager shall further together with the client assume
responsibility for each of the plant as it is accepted at the end of the C5 commissioning stage.
Punch & Rectify (C1 – C3) Cold Commissioning

Once all installation/erection tests and inspections have been signed off, the contractor will
request that pre-commissioning be carried out on equipment, machinery or systems. The
Commissioning Manager will coordinate the pre-commissioning meetings by convening the
relevant parties from client operations, the contractor(s) as well as suppliers where relevant. The
contractor will put forward the pre-commissioning plan for approval, indicating the proposed
activities, safety and risk assessments, scheduling, risk assessment and resourcing. The pre-
commissioning activities on any equipment and/or system will include for, but not limited to:
1. Energising power supply
2. Testing major electrical equipment (transformers, MCCs, motor direction, etc.)
3. Verifying signalling circuits and interlocks and operate instruments and controls as a
complete signal and control system
4. Powering up the distributed control system (DCS) including operator’s console
5. Energising and test control loops and I/O signals within the battery limit of the pre-
commissioning system
6. Functional verification and testing of all safeties and emergency stops
7. Setting torque switches and adjust limit switches
8. Checking oil and lubricant levels
9. Testing electrically or pneumatically operated motor operated valves (MOVs)
10. Verifying control circuits and interlocks and operate instruments and controls as systems
11. Bumping motors for rotation, do vibration tests uncoupled, then couple
12. Ding vibration testing on coupled drives
13. Checking tracking of individual conveyors and belt alignment monitoring
14. Running the equipment as a system and check operation of safeties, interlocks, belt
speeds, chute blocked detection, luff and slew performance, etc. without product

15. After the conformance to pre-commissioning performance specifications is witnessed,

verified and signed off by the various parties, data sheets and test records are completed
for handover to commissioning team
16. Mechanical acceptance certificates provided so that hot commissioning may commence.
For the Cold Commissioning (C1 to C3) activities, time has been allowed for contractors to rectify
punch items, as well as the turnaround time for approvals when applying for the different cold
commissioning certification. The breakdown of mechanical/electrical cold commissioning activities
are as follows:
1. Initial punching by project team
2. Rectify punch item category A and B emanating from initial punching
3. Back punch after rectification by project team
4. Initial Client punch
5. Rectify punch items emanating from initial Client punch.
6. Client back punch after rectifications
7. Practical completion/C1 achieved (Individual item installation complete)
8. Test individual item
9. C2 achieved (Individual item starts)
10. Complete all remaining punch items categories before C3 application
11. Final punch of remaining Category C-E punch items
12. Area dry operational test interface with other units in area (Data books, as-built drawings
submission required)
13. C3 achieved (Area operational)
For civil works, the activities for cold commissioning would not be as long as for the installation
packages, as there will not be any physical C2 to C5 activities. Once C1 has been achieved, C2 to
C5 activities become a documentation exercise until handover. The breakdown of civil and
earthworks cold commissioning activities is as follows:
1. Initial punching by project team
2. Rectify punch item category A and B emanating from initial punching
3. Back punching by project team
4. Initial Client punch
5. Rectify punch items emanating from initial Client punch.
6. Client back punch after rectifications
7. C2 to C5 commissioning stages’ paperwork to handover certificates
8. Complete all remaining punch items categories before C5 application.
Hot Commissioning/Handover (C4 – C5)

For the hot commissioning (C4 and C5) activities, time has been allowed for contractors to fine
tune the plant with material load to obtain C4 approval. Following which time has been allowed
for plant optimisation and ramp up to obtain C5 approval. The hot commissioning activities have
been broken down into the following stages:

1. Piping pressurization as directed by the Engineer

2. Performance testing as directed by the Engineer
For civil works, the activities for hot commissioning are a documentation exercise to achieve the
handover certificate and include the following activities:
1. C4 achieved
2. Project team/Client interface
3. C5 achieved
11. SAFETY DURING COMMISSIONING

The key safety issue associated with commissioning is the management of the interfaces between
commissioning, construction and the operation. Plans will be implemented to ensure a smooth
transition from a construction phase, to cold commissioning, to hot commissioning and ramp up
phases, when equipment is energised, tested and run. The interface between commissioning and
construction and operations activities at the project site will be managed with agreed isolation
and tagging procedures, training sessions and regular meetings for review and coordination.
There will be one common safety system for isolation between all phases from construction to
operations but with different authorities for approvals at each phase. Details of specific safety
related practices are given in the following sections.
Site induction
All commissioning team members and vendor representatives will be inducted prior to working on
site. In the case of short visits and when induction is impractical, the visitor will be accompanied
at all times on the plant site by an inducted person. Items to be emphasised during commissioning
inductions include:
1. Emergency telephone numbers and radio channels
2. Location of evacuation points
3. Wearing of personal protective equipment
4. Standard operating procedures
5. Hazardous chemicals, pressures
6. Job safety analysis
7. Isolation and tagging procedures
8. First aid and paramedic facilities.
The Safety Officer or delegate will conduct site inductions.
Handover identification

The handover identification program facilitates the transfer of equipment systems from the
custody of construction to cold commissioning and then to hot commissioning. Handover
identification is achieved by access control and signage at the entrances to buildings and areas
identifying the status of the equipment within the area or building and the person responsible for
activities within the area. Different colour tags are used to identify the operational status of
specific equipment. The handover identification program performs two functions. First, it
provides a boundary within which work or testing may be performed safely. Secondly, it provides
personnel with a notification of the extent that certain equipment or systems will be either out of
service or have their service restricted. Any other group wishing to work on equipment in the
area must obtain authorisation from the authority indicated on the entrance signage.
Energisation
Following the transfer of a section of the plant from construction to cold commissioning the
responsible commissioning manager will ensure that all inspection and testing necessary for the
safe energisation of the equipment has been completed. A site wide notification is then issued
which identifies the equipment that is about to be energised. This procedure applies to the
energisation of systems including Low Voltage (LV) electrical equipment, mechanical equipment,
process vessels and piping systems. The notice of energisation warns of the potential exposure
to electrical hazards, moving equipment, hazardous equipment or hazardous materials.
Isolation & Lockout Procedure

The Client’s ‘Permit to Work’ and ‘Lockout Procedures’ will apply throughout commissioning. The
Commissioning Manager shall ensure that the latest Client Lockout Procedures are being used
and implemented. All devices will be locked out at transfer from construction to cold
commissioning. Devices will only be activated during periods of testing and immediately on
completing the testing whereby the devices will be locked out again. The Commissioning Manager
responsible for a project area (responsible person) will approach the appropriate authorised
person who will apply the principal lock to the isolation device for any piece of operable equipment
in that area in the presence of the responsible person. The authorised person will also attach to
the lock an isolation tag that provides the required details of the isolation. Anyone who works on
isolated system will apply a lock to the principal isolation device during the period that they are
actively working on the isolated system. When it is necessary to operate a piece of equipment
the authorised person will ensure that the equipment is safe to operate and that no other locks
remain before removing the principal lock.
Permit to work
Work permits are used to control the performance of work on components and systems under
the control of commissioning. Work control is necessary to ensure that any previous
commissioning work is not invalidated and that components and systems are available to support
the project commissioning schedule. Work control complements the safety isolation procedure in
the protection of personnel and equipment from hazards due to pressures, temperatures or
voltages. The work authorisation authority, in this case the Client, will review the work with the

requestor and analyse potential risks and hazards presented by the work or by simultaneous
activities on nearby or related systems and equipment. If necessary, they will develop a list of
procedures or measures to protect the requestor, its workers, others and the equipment or system
from these hazards throughout the planned work activity. The work authorisation authority, after
determining that the requested work can be accomplished, will provide a work window based on
the requestor's work duration estimate and prepare the work authorisation to identify the work
desired.
Hot Work Permit

Hot work permits operate in a similar way to work permits but are applied to activities where
there is a fire hazard, such as grinding, flame cutting and welding. The permits are only issued
for a single shift and require a work site inspection at the end of the task to ensure that there is
no further risk of fire.
Risk management
Commissioning testing frequently requires equipment to be operated in a manner that is not
covered by a standard operating procedure. In these circumstances a risk assessment, including
a risk mitigation plan must be compiled and approved prior to the start of the task. The risk
assessment will consider each step of the task and evaluate potential hazards for likelihood and
severity. Measures to minimise the risks will be identified and a member of the work team will
be nominated to be responsible for the application of each control measure.
Tagging
A system of tags will be used to provide a record of inspection and checks to facilitate a systematic
check out of equipment and ensure the safety of all involved. The systems of tags proposed for
this project will be as per the Client’s lock out procedure. No tag present means that equipment
is still under construction and not ready for any testing.
1. Blue Commissioning Tag:
The contractor commissioning team attaches this blue tag to each piece of equipment
after installation is completed and Client commissioning engineer have signed off the
relevant check-out acceptance certificate. This signifies that C2 cold commissioning can
commence.
2. Red Personal Danger (Isolation) Tag:

The red personal danger tag is part of a procedure that is used to assure the positive
lockout of equipment for the following purposes:
a. To prevent the operation of equipment, either electrical or mechanical, at a time
when this would endanger the safety of men working on such equipment
b. To prevent the operation or energising of equipment which could possibly result in
damage to the equipment
c. This system is an essential part of job safety and must be strictly observed as it
involves the life and safety of men.

3. Green Tag:
The green tag indicates that the equipment has been handed over to operations. This will
typically happen for the C4 commissioning phase.
12. COMMISSIONING PHASES

The following phases of construction and commissioning and the mandated deliverables from an
integral part to achieve project completion are as follow:
C0 – Commissioning - Preparation
All the necessary and applicable deliverables as applicable and required for commissioning would
be required prior to the start of cold commissioning.
The following handover documentation are required, as applicable, at completion of this phase:
1. Area technical review minutes and actions.
2. Cold commissioning team identified and approved by Client’s manager.
3. Hot commissioning team identified and approved by Client’s manager.
4. Commissioning risk assessment conducted, approved and distributed to commissioning
team.
5. Piping and instrument diagrams.
6. Process flow diagrams.
7. Mechanical equipment list.
8. Piping line list.
9. Valve list.
10. Electrical component list.
11. Electrical equipment list.
12. Instrumentation list.
13. Software factory acceptance testing completed and signed off.
14. Works instructions and training manual developed and signed off.
15. Critical spares list completed and available.
16. Planned maintenance schedule compiled and available.
17. Vendor installations maintenance procedures available.
18. Plant maintenance personnel training manuals developed and maintenance personnel
training complete. (Where applicable on “new” vendor technology)
19. Equipment data sheets.
20. Factory acceptance tested software control narrative.
21. References to associated vendor information/drawings.

C1 – Commissioning – Construction Testing

The civil, mechanical, electrical, control & instrumentation hardware installation, Contractors shall
be required to hand-over documents pertaining to the process area to the project construction
manager. Cold commissioning will not commence for the process area until the project
construction manager is satisfied that the plant has been constructed in accordance with the
project execution approved design and technical specifications. The project construction manager
will issue the relevant handover, Completion Certificate to project commissioning manager. Such
Completion Certificate template is represented in Annexure A.
Notes:
1. The punch listing or facility inspection is performed by the responsible engineer,
construction manager’s representatives, contractor and clients team members and all
known defects are listed
2. Issuance of a Completion Certificate to the contractor for the relevant system shall be
made, provided that the data books have been submitted and approved and all punch list
category ”A ” items are rectified and completed.
The following handover documentation, as applicable, are required at completion of this phase:
1. Completed C1 check sheets
2. Punch list (Prioritized A, B, C & D category ratings)
3. Completion Certificate (Issued per subsystem per contractor)
4. All relevant drawings red lined to as-built status and signed off
5. P&IDs red lined to as-built status and signed off
6. PFDs red lined to as-built status and signed off
7. Software factory acceptance test certificate.
C2 – Commissioning – Equipment Testing

The Commissioning Manager and the associated commissioning resources will complete all
mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and software installation loop tests pertaining to a process
area, to ensure all energised equipment are functioning correctly as per approved design and
technical specification. Once all the equipment testing is complete and the necessary data books
and certificates have been submitted and punch list categories “A” and “B” items have been signed
off, the Commissioning Manager may issue the Take-Over, Care Certificate (TC) to the discipline
installation contractor(s). The Take-Over, Care Certificate is represented in Annexure B.
Notes:
1. The accepted areas of the plant will be declared “Live” and a “Permit to Work” system will
be implemented. These areas will be identified and clearly marked on a plot plan and
displayed at the contractors meetings.
2. The individual equipment is demonstrated (without product) to the full commissioning
team to prove that start and stop functions are controlled.

3. Permits to Work will be issued to allow either construction to continue or give permission
to test equipment. Any permit to work shall be conducted in accordance with the Client’s
lockout procedure.
1. Software loop checklist.
2. Punch list category “A” and “B” items completed.
3. Take-over, Care certificate.
C3 – Commissioning – Systems Testing with water

The Commissioning Manager and the associated commissioning resources will test the operation
of the equipment grouped together into systems, using mainly sea water only. The control
modules and equipment modules pertaining to a process area will be tested to ensure correct
functioning as per approved design and technical specifications. The process system start-up and
operation will then be demonstrated to the Client’s commissioning team with the introduction of
process materials (sea water). Once the Commissioning Manager is satisfied that all cold
commissioning activities are completed, a Take-Over, Care & Control Certificate (TCC), as
represented in Annexure C, will be issued by the Project Manager and accepted by the Client’s
Commissioning Manager. This will signify the commencement of process system hot
commissioning.
Notes:
1. Completion by contractor(s) of the entire Punch list category “A” and Punch list category
“B” items for the relevant system(s) to be tested, is a pre-requisite to starting C3-
Commissioning.
2. Punch list category “C” items completed.
3. The Contractor shall be required to compile all vendor data, permits, test certificates,
inspection approvals and “As-Built” information during this stage (data packs).
4. During the C3-Commissioning – Systems testing stage, the necessary HAZOP study shall
be completed, prior to starting with C4-Commissioning – Process Commissioning.
1. Take-Over, Care & Control Certificate (TCC)
2. Punch list category “C” items completed.
C4 – Commissioning – Process Commissioning (Operational Team)

The Client’s Commissioning Manager and the associated Client’s commissioning team resources
shall be required to introduce process material into the system to ensure all process controls are
functioning correctly as per approved design and technical specifications. The Client’s
Commissioning Manager and the associated Client’s Commissioning resources will ensure that the
process system with all associated control loops is stabilised and controlling as per the approved
design and technical specifications. All unit/system process controls have been tested with
process materials and process control loops are functioning. Once the Commissioning Manager
is satisfied that all hot commissioning activities are completed, a Total Care, Custody & Control

Certificate (TCCC), as represented in Annexure D, will be issued by the Project Manager and
accepted by the Client’s Commissioning Manager.
1. Total Care, Custody & Control Certificate (TCCC)
2. Punch List category “C” items have been completed.
C5 – Commissioning – Ramp-up (Operational Team)

The process area Operations Manager and the associated operations commissioning engineers
will continue ongoing optimisation and ramp-up of the stabilised process system as per approved
design and technical specifications. Once all training of production site personnel has been
completed by the area Operations Manager(s) and the associated resources to the satisfaction of
the area Operations Manager(s), the area Operations Manager(s) will issue the Clients manager
with the final process area handover documents. The Clients manager will, in-turn issue the
process area handover document to the business unit manager. This signifies the final acceptance
of the process system by business unit operations and initiates project close-out.
Note:
1. During C5 Commissioning the necessary HAZOP study shall be required in order to identify
all necessary and associated operational risks inclusive of all associated mitigation
measures.
No handover documentation, as applicable, is required at completion of this stage as everything

should have been handed over already in the previous commissioning phases.
13. PUNCH LIST

During cold commissioning a list of deficiencies is generated to identify items that have to be
corrected before the completion of the project. These deficiencies are ranked according to
seriousness and urgency to manage their correction. The classifications and their definitions are
listed in the table below:
Category: Definition:
Critical (Safety, Interference with production) Mandatory prior to C2
A
commissioning
Not critical (General defects. Cannot be rectified when plant is running) can
B
be rectified during the next stage of commissioning.
Not critical (Remaining work, but can be rectified when plant is running)
C
must be rectified before the final plant acceptance.

Extra Work (Not in contractor’s scope of work; “Nice-to-have”; Not essential

D
to safety or process; subject to Site Instruction or Change Notice.)
A central database will be maintained on site for all punch list items to facilitate management of
the corrective actions and ensure that all deficiencies are corrected in a timely manner and that
the corrective actions are fully documented. The punch list will be managed in turn by the
commissioning manager, the Client’s commissioning manager and the ramp up manager. The
current commissioning manager will review all deficiency items generated on the project and
approve them prior to entry into the database
14. TAKE-OVER CERTIFICATES

As the entire plant may not be handed over at once, the Client’s team and project manager’s
construction teams may have to co-exist for a period of time. To minimise the problems, which
such a situation creates, the interface between the Client and contractor must be clearly defined.
Areas and systems that have been handed over to the Client are “out of bounds” to the contractor.
The contractor must seek special permission if work has to be done by him in such areas. On the
other hand, the Client’s activities must be confined only to areas and systems that have been
taken over from the contractor(s).
Completion Certificate
This certificate as represented in Annexure A, may be prepared for equipment, systems or areas
and serves to handover the equipment from C1-commissioning-construction completion to C2-
commissioning-equipment testing. This certificate does not exempt the contractor from his
contractual obligations. It does not certify that the contract is completed nor serves any
authorisation for payment. The engineer responsible for the particular system or piece of
equipment will draft the Completion Certificate, as represented in Annexure B, only after the
following has been fulfilled:
1. The installation of the equipment is essentially complete with only minor defects
remaining.
2. All prescribed inspection and testing has been carried out satisfactorily and the QCPs have
been approved and signed.
3. All equipment and systems conform to the equipment design and technical specifications.
An important part of the Completion certificate is the list of defects. Prior to handover, the
equipment or facility is inspected by the engineer in co-operation with the contractor and the
Client’s team and all known defects are listed with indication of party responsible for the
correction. There can be several sources of defects: e.g. faulty or incomplete installation, poor
design, omissions, fabrication errors, etc. However, at this stage the defects should be minor in
nature and should never jeopardise the safety of operations. It must be recognised that a number
of defects can be detected only after actual operation commences. Therefore, the listed items of

defects on the Completion Certificate does not exempt the contractor or the supplier from their
respective responsibilities and warranties.
Take-Over, Care Certificate (Install Contracts)

A Take-Over, Care Certificate, as represented in Annexure B, issued by the project manager to
the installation contractor/s to:
1. Handover equipment or systems at the completion of C2-commissioning-equipment
testing provided that all punch list “A” and “B” items are completed.
2. Handover equipment in accordance with the contract conditions.
3. Establish the date from which the installation contractor’s defects liability period
commences.
Take-Over, Care Certificate (Design & Supply Contracts)

A Take-Over, Care Certificate, as represented in Annexure C, issued by the project manager to
the design and supply contractor to:
1. Handover equipment or systems typically at the completion of C4-commissioning-process
commissioning provided that all punch list “A” and “B” items are completed.
2. Handover equipment in accordance with the contract conditions.
3. Establish the date from which the Design and Supply Contractor’s defects liability period
commences.
Take-Over, Care & Control Certificate (TCC)

A certificate as represented in Annexure D, may be issued by the project manager for acceptance
by the Clients manager to:
1. Handover work that has passed final inspection and C3-commissioning-systems testing by
the commissioning team and is ready for the Client’s team to commence with C4-
commissioning-process commissioning.
2. Indicate beneficial occupation of the plant has been taken.
The Client’s manager will not be expected to take responsibility for the safe operation of the
various systems without proper technical documentation. It is therefore essential that all the
handover documents including all test certificates and defects lists in the data packs, as-built
P&IDs and vendor operating and maintenance manuals where required be made available to the
Client’s manager by the time of systems acceptance. It is the responsibility of the engineer for a
particular system to ensure that this takes place and is ready prior to the preparation of the Take-
Over, Care & Control Certificate, as represented in Annexure D. An optional flow sheet for
procedure and routing forms part of these procedures. The Client’s personnel shall under no
circumstances operate equipment or work in areas that have not yet been handed over from the
contractor to the Client’s manager on this TCC certificate (beneficial occupation).
Total Care, Custody & Control Certificate (TCCC)

A Total Care, Custody & Control Certificate, as represented in Annexure E, issued by the Client’s
commissioning managers to the Client’s Area managers to:
1. Handover the plant to production and optimisation after successful C4-commissioning-
process commissioning. This certificate indicates final project acceptance in all respects
of installation and performance. Optimisation, full load performance testing and training
of operators and shift foremen during C5-commissioning-ramp-up are still to be
completed. These tasks are the responsibility of the area operations managers.
15. ANNEXURES

Annexure A – Completion Certificate

Completion Certificate (CC)
Completion of Construction and Installation (i.e. Check-Out Acceptance)

Completion Certificate No:
Date: Originator:
Project Name: Project Manger:
Contract No: Contractor/Supplier:
Contract Description:
Facility: System:
Unit/Equipment No:
Comments:
If yes, attached defects list to this

Defects list items outstanding Yes No
certificate
Note:
1) Category "A" defects MUST be complete prior to approval of this certificate.
2) Defects list item no's:
It is hereby certified that the Installation / Equipment defined above has been successfully Inspected,
Tested, Rectified as noted above, and is released for the “Cold Commissioning” stage of work and that the
attached Defects shall be rectified by the stipulated due dates.
This release in no manner relieves the Contractor and/or his sub-contractors and/or Suppliers of his
Contractual obligations in terms of the Contract, and/or warranty, and/or performance guarantee. It is the
Contractor’s obligation to ensure that the Installation / Equipment is safe in terms of the OHS Act of South
Africa to progress into the “Cold Commissioning” stage of work.
The Designer hereby declares that the Installation of the Equipment defined above is safe to use in terms of
the OHS Act of South Africa and is ready to be energised and used for “Cold Commissioning” purposes.
Designation: Name: Date: Signature:
Contractor/Supplier
NEC Supervisor
NEC Project Manager
Resident Engineer
Client Construction Manager
Client Commissioning Manager
TNPA
Transnet Operating
Division Manager TPT
TFR
Employer (Transnt Group Capital)
Annexure B – Take-Over, Care Certificate

Take-over, Care Certificate (TC)
Completion of Cold Commissioning

Take-over, Care Certificate No:
Date: Originator:
Facility:
Unit/Equipment No:
Comments:

certificate
Note:
1) Category "B" defects MUST be complete prior to approval of this certificate.
It is hereby certified that the System / Equipment defined above has been successfully “Cold
Commissioned”, Rectified as noted above, and is released for the “Hot Commissioning” stage of work and
that and that the attached Defects shall be rectified by the stipulated due dates.
Contractual obligations in terms of the Contract, and/or warranty, and/or performance guarantee.
the OHS Act of South Africa and is ready to be used for “Hot Commissioning” purposes.
Contractor/Supplier
NEC Supervisor
NEC Project Manager
Resident Engineer
TNPA
Transnet Operating
TFR

Annexure C – Take-Over, Care & Control Certificate

Take-over, Care and Control Certificate (TCC)
Preliminary Plan Acceptance (i.e. Beneficial Occupation)

Take-over, Care & Control Certificate No:
Date: Originator:
Facility:
Unit/Equipment No:
Comments:

certificate
Note:
1) Category "C" defects MUST be complete prior to approval of this certificate.
It is hereby certified that the Facility / System / Equipment defined above has been successfully “Hot
Commissioned”, Rectified as noted above, and is released for the “Start-Up and Performance Testing” stage
of work and that the attached Defects shall be rectified by the stipulated due dates.
Contractual obligations in terms of the Contract, and/or warranty, and/or performance guarantee. The
Employer hereby accepts the responsibility as “User” of the above referenced Facility / System / Equipment
for Operations Control and Maintenance under the OHS Act of South Africa.
Contractor/Supplier
NEC Supervisor
NEC Project Manager
Resident Engineer
TNPA
Transnet Operating
TFR

Annexure D – Total Care, Custody & Control Certificate

Total Care,Custody & Control Certificate (TCCC)
Final Plan Acceptance

Total Care, Cutody & Control Certificate No:
Date:
Originator:
Project Name:
Project Manger:
Plant:
Facility:
Comments:

certificate
Note:
1) Category "C" defects MUST be complete prior to approval of this certificate.
Subject to the attached Category “C” Defects being rectified by the stipulated due date, the Employer
hereby accepts the above referenced Plant as complete in all regards of installation and performance.
Contractor/Supplier
NEC Supervisor
NEC Project Manager
Resident Engineer
TNPA
Transnet Operating
TFR

Annexure E – Completion/Takeover Certificate

Completion/Take Over Certificate
Contract No:
Contractor:
COMPLETION/TAKE OVER CERTIFICATE
Date of Contractor's application for Take-Over by Notice
APPLICABLE SECTION OF PART OF THE WORKS
The whole of the works / Section or part of the works
Description of Section or
Part
DATE OF COMPLETION OF THE WORKS and remedial work to the satisfaction
of the Project Manager, warranting the issue of a Completion/Take Over
certificate (Commencement of Defects Correction/Defects Liability Period)
DATE OF ISSUE OF THIS COMPLETION/TAKE OVER CERTIFICATE
RELEVANT INFORMATION:
Date of Completion of Tests on Completion
THIS TAKE-OVER CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED SUBJECT TO:
Date by which Contractor undertakes to complete outstanding work
The satisfactory completion of the outstanding work required of the Contractor as set out in the
(a)
attached Defects Certificate
The completion of such outstanding work by Contractor, by the date/dates listed in the attached
(b)
Defects Certificate.
The understanding that should the Defects as per the attached Defects list not be completed by
(c) the dates stipulated there in, then this Take-Over Certificate will be deemed to have not having
been issued.
(d) The following comments:
We, the undersigned hereby agree that the relative Works under this Contract have been substantially
completed and the issue of a Take-Over Certificate to Contractor is authorised.
Contractor/Supplier
NEC Supervisor
Construction Manager
Commissioning Manager/Engineer
Contract Administrator
Client Representative
NEC Project Manager

Supply and Installation of Firefighting and Protection System For Berth B100 Part 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Supply and Installation of Firefighting and Protection System For Berth B100 Part 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Supply and Installation of Firefighting and Protection System For Berth B100 Part 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BID ADVERTISEMENT FORM

Supply and Installation of Firefighting and Protection System for

Name of institution Transnet Group Capital

Sector Mechanical Engineering

Region Eastern Cape

Date 09 November 2017

Compulsory briefing Time 10:00

BID ADVERTISEMENT FORM

ENQUIRY FOR THE SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF FIREFIGHTING AND

RFP Number 1126901.M001

Issue Date 01 November 2017

Briefing Session and Site Visit Thursday, 09 November 2017 at

Tender Validity Period 12 weeks from the Closing Date

NEC3 ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Enquiry Documents

CONTRACT NO. 1126901.M001

SECTION DESCRIPTION AMOUNT

SECTION A: PRELIMINARY & GENERAL

SECTION B: SITE CLEARANCE & GENERAL

SECTION C: CONCRETE AND BUILDING WORKS

SECTION D: STORMWATER DRAINAGE AND PIPEWORK

SECTION I: FIRE WATER PUMP PACKAGE

SECTION J: FIRE WATER SYSTEM

SECTION K: FOAM SYSTEM

SECTION L: PORTABLE FIRE EQUIPMENT AND SIGNAGE

SECTION M: DESIGN REVIEW

ADD 14% VAT

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF SCHEDULES

DATE NAME Sign

SECTION 1 BILL NO.1

The works information and NEC contract conditions are to be

8.3 SCHEDULED FIXED- CHARGE AND VALUE RELATED ITEMS

8.3.1 Contractual requirements Item 1

8.3.2 Establishment of faccilities for the site

8.3.2.1 Facilities for the Engineer

a) Furnished Offices Item 1

8.3.2.2 Facilities for Contractor Item 1

a) Offices and storage sheds Item 1

d) Living accomidation Item 1

e) Ablution and latrine facilities Item 1

f) Tools and equipment Item 1

g) Water, electricity and communications Item 1

h) Dealing with water item 1

i) Access and access control Item 1

8.3.3 Other Fixed Charged Obligations Item 1

8.3.4 Removal of site establishment Item 1

8.4 SCHEDULED TIME RELATED ITEMS

8.4.1 Contractual requirements Months 13

Operation and maintenance of facilities on site for

8.4.2.1 Facilities for the Engineer

a) Furnished offices Months 13

c) Name boards Months 13

d) Survey assistance and materials Months 13

8.4.2.2 Facilities for the Contractor

a) Offices and storage Months 13

d) Living accomidation Months 13

e) Ablution and latrine facilities Months 13

f) Tools and equipment Months 13

g) Water, electricity and communications Months 13

h) Dealing with water Months 13